00384238-OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R008 - 03)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue Date Part Number
03 2008-07-30 00384238
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Network Application.................................................................................................................1-1 2 Function........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Capacity...........................................................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity.........................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity..............................................................................................................................2-5 2.2 Service.............................................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.1 Service Type...........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................................2-8 2.3 Interface...........................................................................................................................................................2-9 2.3.1 Service Interfaces...................................................................................................................................2-9 2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces..............................................................................................2-10 2.4 Networking....................................................................................................................................................2-11 2.5 Built-in WDM Technology...........................................................................................................................2-13 2.6 Extended Subrack..........................................................................................................................................2-14 2.7 Board REG Function.....................................................................................................................................2-15 2.8 Protection......................................................................................................................................................2-16 2.8.1 Equipment Level Protection.................................................................................................................2-16 2.8.2 Network Level Protection....................................................................................................................2-17 2.9 ASON Features.............................................................................................................................................2-18 2.10 TCM............................................................................................................................................................2-18 2.11 E13/M13 Function.......................................................................................................................................2-19 2.12 RPR.............................................................................................................................................................2-19 2.13 ETH-OAM..................................................................................................................................................2-19 2.14 Software Package Loading..........................................................................................................................2-20 2.15 Hot Patch.....................................................................................................................................................2-21 2.16 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression..................................................................................................................2-21 2.17 PRBS Function............................................................................................................................................2-21 2.18 Board Version Replacement........................................................................................................................2-22 2.19 NSF Function..............................................................................................................................................2-22 2.20 OAM Information Interworking..................................................................................................................2-23 2.21 Clock...........................................................................................................................................................2-23 Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd i
Contents
2.22 OAM............................................................................................................................................................2-23 2.23 Security Management..................................................................................................................................2-24
3 Hardware......................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.3 Subrack............................................................................................................................................................3-3 3.3.1 Subrack Structure...................................................................................................................................3-4 3.3.2 Slot Allocation........................................................................................................................................3-4 3.4 Boards..............................................................................................................................................................3-6 3.4.1 Board Type.............................................................................................................................................3-6 3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards.........................................................................................3-10 3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-11 3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-17 3.4.5 DDN Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-22 3.4.6 Data Processing Boards........................................................................................................................3-23 3.4.7 WDM Boards.......................................................................................................................................3-29 3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards........................................................................................................3-32 3.4.9 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................................3-33
4 Software....................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Board Software................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.3 NE Software....................................................................................................................................................4-3 4.4 T2000 System..................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.5 ASON Software...............................................................................................................................................4-5
5 Data Features...............................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Ethernet Features.............................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-10 5.1.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-14 5.2 RPR Features.................................................................................................................................................5-18 5.2.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-19 5.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-22 5.2.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-24 5.3 ATM Features...............................................................................................................................................5-28 5.3.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-28 5.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-30 5.3.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-34 5.4 SAN Features................................................................................................................................................5-35 5.5 DDN Features................................................................................................................................................5-36 5.5.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-36 5.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-37 ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Contents
5.5.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-37
6 DCN Features..............................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN......................................................................................................................6-3 6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions..............................................................................................................................6-3 6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes..........................................................................................................6-4 6.2 HWECC..........................................................................................................................................................6-4 6.2.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-5 6.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-5 6.3 IP Over DCC...................................................................................................................................................6-6 6.3.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-7 6.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-7 6.4 OSI Over DCC................................................................................................................................................6-8 6.4.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-8 6.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-8
7 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies.........................................................................................................7-3 7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links..........................................................................................................7-3 7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links..................................................................................................................7-4 7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration..................................................................................................................7-5 7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration................................................................................................7-6 7.4 ASON Clock Tracing......................................................................................................................................7-7 7.5 SLA...............................................................................................................................................................7-10 7.6 Diamond Services.........................................................................................................................................7-11 7.7 Gold Services................................................................................................................................................7-15 7.8 Silver Services...............................................................................................................................................7-16 7.9 Copper Services.............................................................................................................................................7-18 7.10 Iron Services................................................................................................................................................7-19 7.11 Tunnels........................................................................................................................................................7-19 7.12 Service Association.....................................................................................................................................7-21 7.13 Service Optimization...................................................................................................................................7-22 7.14 Service Migration........................................................................................................................................7-23 7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes........................................................................................................7-23 7.16 Preset Restoring Trail..................................................................................................................................7-25 7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail....................................................................................................................7-25 7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic..................................................................................................................7-26 7.19 Shared Risk Link Group..............................................................................................................................7-27 7.20 ASON Trail Group......................................................................................................................................7-27 7.21 Protocol Encryption.....................................................................................................................................7-28 7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane........................................................................................................................7-28
8 Protection.....................................................................................................................................8-1
Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd iii
Contents
8.1 Equipment Level Protection............................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards..................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units....................................................................8-3 8.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit.........................................................................................................8-4 8.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards........................................................................................................8-5 8.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards............................................................................................................ 8-6 8.1.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit....................................................................................... 8-6 8.1.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit....................................................................................8-6 8.1.8 Intelligent Fans.......................................................................................................................................8-7 8.1.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply.............................................................................. 8-7 8.1.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions.....................................................................8-7 8.2 Network Level Protection............................................................................................................................... 8-8 8.2.1 Linear MSP............................................................................................................................................ 8-8 8.2.2 MSP Ring...............................................................................................................................................8-9 8.2.3 SNCP....................................................................................................................................................8-11 8.2.4 DNI.......................................................................................................................................................8-16 8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection..................................................................................................8-18 8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP....................................................................................................................8-18 8.2.7 RPR Protection.....................................................................................................................................8-19 8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection..............................................................................................................8-21
9 Clock.............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Clock Source...................................................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.1 External Clock Source............................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.2 Line Clock Source..................................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source..........................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.4 Internal Clock Source.............................................................................................................................9-3 9.2 Clock Working Mode......................................................................................................................................9-3 9.2.1 Locked Mode..........................................................................................................................................9-3 9.2.2 Holdover Mode...................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.2.3 Free-Run Mode...................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.3 Clock Outputs..................................................................................................................................................9-3 9.4 Clock Protection..............................................................................................................................................9-4 9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled ........................................................................................9-4 9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled ............................................................................... 9-5 9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled ...............................................................................9-6 9.5 Tributary Retiming..........................................................................................................................................9-7 9.5.1 Retiming Principle..................................................................................................................................9-8 9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function....................................................................................................9-8
10 OAM.........................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................................................10-2 10.2 Network Management.................................................................................................................................10-3
iv
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Contents
11 Security Management............................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Authentication Management.......................................................................................................................11-2 11.2 Authorization Management.........................................................................................................................11-2 11.3 Network Security Management...................................................................................................................11-2 11.4 System Security Management.....................................................................................................................11-3 11.5 Log Management.........................................................................................................................................11-3 11.5.1 NE Security Log Management...........................................................................................................11-4 11.5.2 Syslog Management...........................................................................................................................11-4
12 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................12-1
12.1 Interface Types............................................................................................................................................12-3 12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface........................................................................................................12-3 12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface........................................................................................................................12-3 12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface................................................................................................................12-10 12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface.....................................................................................................................12-11 12.2.4 Laser Safety Class............................................................................................................................12-12 12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces.......................................................................................................12-12 12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface..................................................................................................................12-13 12.3.2 DDN Interface..................................................................................................................................12-13 12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface...........................................................................................................................12-14 12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance.....................................................................................12-16 12.4.1 Clock Interface Type........................................................................................................................12-16 12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance.......................................................................................12-16 12.5 Transmission Performance........................................................................................................................12-16 12.6 Timeslot Numbering.................................................................................................................................12-17 12.7 Cabinet and Subrack Specification...........................................................................................................12-17 12.8 Power Supply Specification......................................................................................................................12-18 12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................................................12-19 12.10 Safety Certification.................................................................................................................................12-20 12.11 Environmental Specification...................................................................................................................12-21 12.12 Environment Requirement......................................................................................................................12-21 12.12.1 Environment for Storage................................................................................................................12-22 12.12.2 Environment for Transportation.....................................................................................................12-24 12.12.3 Environment for Operation............................................................................................................12-26
A Power Consumption and Weight of Boards.......................................................................A-1 B Compliant Standards...............................................................................................................B-1

B.1 ITU-T Recommendations..............................................................................................................................B-2 B.2 IEEE Standards..............................................................................................................................................B-4 B.3 IETF Standards..............................................................................................................................................B-5 B.4 ANSI Standards.............................................................................................................................................B-5 B.5 Environment Related Standards.....................................................................................................................B-5 B.6 EMC Standards..............................................................................................................................................B-6 Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd v
Contents
B.7 Safety Compliance Standards........................................................................................................................B-7 B.8 Protection Standards......................................................................................................................................B-7 B.9 ASON Standards............................................................................................................................................B-8
C Basic Principle...........................................................................................................................C-1
C.1 Introduction to SDH.......................................................................................................................................C-2 C.1.1 SDH Levels...........................................................................................................................................C-2 C.1.2 Multiplexing Structure..........................................................................................................................C-2 C.1.3 Basic Frame Structure...........................................................................................................................C-3 C.1.4 SOH Description...................................................................................................................................C-3 C.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description.............................................................................................C-6 C.2 Introduction to ATM......................................................................................................................................C-7 C.2.1 Introduction to ATM.............................................................................................................................C-7 C.2.2 ATM Cell Structure..............................................................................................................................C-8 C.3 Introduction to Ethernet.................................................................................................................................C-8 C.3.1 Basic Technologies...............................................................................................................................C-9 C.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure....................................................................................................................C-10 C.4 Link Aggregation.........................................................................................................................................C-10 C.4.1 Concepts..............................................................................................................................................C-10 C.4.2 Characteristics.....................................................................................................................................C-11 C.5 Introduction to MPLS..................................................................................................................................C-11 C.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................C-12 C.5.2 Encapsulation Format.........................................................................................................................C-12 C.6 QinQ Principle.............................................................................................................................................C-13 C.6.1 Introduction to QinQ...........................................................................................................................C-13 C.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure................................................................................................................C-13
D Glossary..................................................................................................................................... D-1 E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1 Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1
vi
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500..................................................................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500....................................................................................1-3 Figure 2-1 Access capacity of each slot when the N1GXCSA board is used......................................................2-5 Figure 2-2 Access capacity of each slot when the N1EXCSA board is used.......................................................2-5 Figure 2-3 Access capacity of each slot when the N1UXCSA/B board is used..................................................2-6 Figure 2-4 Access capacity of each slot when the N1SXCSA/B board is used...................................................2-6 Figure 2-5 Access capacity of each slot when the N1IXCSA/B board is used....................................................2-6 Figure 2-6 Connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack....................................................2-15 Figure 2-7 Hybrid application of ADM and REG..............................................................................................2-15 Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment....................................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet..........................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.........................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack......................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-5 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500.....................................................................................3-7 Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture...............................................................................................................4-5 Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port................................................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services...............................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID...................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS.........................................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ...........................................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-6 EPLAN service.................................................................................................................................5-13 Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service..............................................................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-8 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS..............................................................................5-15 Figure 5-9 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS....................................................................5-16 Figure 5-10 RPR ring.........................................................................................................................................5-18 Figure 5-11 Spatial reuse....................................................................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-12 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1........................................................................................5-22 Figure 5-13 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different.........................................................................5-22 Figure 5-14 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping........................................................................5-23 Figure 5-15 EVPL service convergence.............................................................................................................5-23 Figure 5-16 RPR EVPLAN service....................................................................................................................5-24 Figure 5-17 Wrapping protection.......................................................................................................................5-25 Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd vii
Figures
Figure 5-18 Steering protection..........................................................................................................................5-26 Figure 5-19 Wrapping+steering protection........................................................................................................5-27 Figure 5-20 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services.......................................................................5-32 Figure 5-21 VP-Ring/VC-Ring..........................................................................................................................5-33 Figure 5-22 IMA service networking.................................................................................................................5-34 Figure 6-1 DCN network......................................................................................................................................6-2 Figure 6-2 Positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads........................................................................................6-3 Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC.........................................................................................................6-5 Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)................................6-6 Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)..................................6-6 Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (IP)................................6-7 Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (IP)..............................6-8 Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (OSI).............................6-9 Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (OSI).........................6-10 Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links..........................................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-2 Management of control topology.......................................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery.......................................................................................................................7-5 Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration.......................................................................................................7-6 Figure 7-5 Trail restoration..................................................................................................................................7-7 Figure 7-6 ASON clock subnet............................................................................................................................7-8 Figure 7-7 Diamond Services.............................................................................................................................7-12 Figure 7-8 Gold services....................................................................................................................................7-15 Figure 7-9 A silver service.................................................................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-10 Tunnel.............................................................................................................................................7-20 Figure 7-11 Lower cross-connection..................................................................................................................7-20 Figure 7-12 Service association.........................................................................................................................7-22 Figure 7-13 Shared mesh restoration trail..........................................................................................................7-25 Figure 7-14 Traffic equilibrium.........................................................................................................................7-26 Figure 7-15 LCAS (different path).....................................................................................................................7-27 Figure 7-16 LCAS (same path)..........................................................................................................................7-27 Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail.........................8-12 Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection......................................................................................................8-13 Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking.........................................................................................................................8-14 Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure..................................................................8-15 Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure....................................................................8-15 Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings...................................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection..................................................................................................8-18 Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP.................................................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines.........................................................................8-19 Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR........................................................................................................8-20 Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection...............................................................................................................8-21 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Figures
Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection..................................................................................................................8-21 Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection.........................................................................................................8-22 Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled...........................................................................................9-5 Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM........................................................................................................9-5 Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled...............................................................9-6 Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID...........................................................................................................9-7 Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram................................................................................................................9-8 Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming.....................................................................................9-9 Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming..........................................................................................9-9 Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting.......................................................................11-4 Figure C-1 Multiplexing structure.......................................................................................................................C-3 Figure C-2 STM-N frame structure.....................................................................................................................C-3 Figure C-3 STM-1 SOH......................................................................................................................................C-4 Figure C-4 STM-4 SOH......................................................................................................................................C-4 Figure C-5 STM-16 SOH....................................................................................................................................C-5 Figure C-6 STM-64 SOH....................................................................................................................................C-5 Figure C-7 ATM cell structure............................................................................................................................C-8 Figure C-8 Ethernet frame structure..................................................................................................................C-10 Figure C-9 Schematic diagram of link aggregation...........................................................................................C-11 Figure C-10 MPLS encapsulation format..........................................................................................................C-12 Figure C-11 QinQ data frame structure.............................................................................................................C-14 Figure C-12 C-TAG TCI structure....................................................................................................................C-14 Figure C-13 S-TAG TCI structure....................................................................................................................C-15
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
ix
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500................................................................................. 2-3 Table 2-2 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.................................................................................2-7 Table 2-3 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500................................................................2-8 Table 2-4 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................................................................2-9 Table 2-5 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................2-10 Table 2-6 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................................................................2-11 Table 2-7 Configuration of the extended subrack..............................................................................................2-14 Table 2-8 Boards that support the REG function...............................................................................................2-16 Table 2-9 Optical interfaces for the REG...........................................................................................................2-16 Table 2-10 Equipment level protection..............................................................................................................2-17 Table 2-11 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................2-17 Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards.............3-6 Table 3-2 Constituent boards and functions of each unit.....................................................................................3-8 Table 3-3 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500.................3-10 Table 3-4 SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500.............................................3-11 Table 3-5 SDH processing boards......................................................................................................................3-15 Table 3-6 PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500.............................................3-17 Table 3-7 PDH processing boards......................................................................................................................3-21 Table 3-8 DDN processing boards and their valid slots.....................................................................................3-22 Table 3-9 DDN processing boards.....................................................................................................................3-22 Table 3-10 Data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................3-23 Table 3-11 Data processing boards and their interfaces.....................................................................................3-27 Table 3-12 WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................................3-29 Table 3-13 WDM boards and their interfaces....................................................................................................3-31 Table 3-14 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500.............................3-32 Table 3-15 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces......................................................................3-33 Table 3-16 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................3-34 Table 3-17 Auxiliary boards and their interfaces...............................................................................................3-34 Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0...........................................................................................................5-2 Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2...........................................................................................................................5-4 Table 5-3 Function list of EGS4...........................................................................................................................5-5 Table 5-4 Function list of EMS4..........................................................................................................................5-6 Table 5-5 Function list of EAS2...........................................................................................................................5-8 Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd xi
Tables
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 5-6 Function list of EGT2, EFT8, and EFT8A...........................................................................................5-9 Table 5-7 Function list of RPR boards...............................................................................................................5-19 Table 5-8 RPR service class...............................................................................................................................5-20 Table 5-9 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1..........................................................................................................5-28 Table 5-10 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1...........................................................................................................5-29 Table 5-11 ATM service types and traffic types................................................................................................5-31 Table 5-12 Classification of ATM protection....................................................................................................5-34 Table 5-13 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4...........................................................................5-35 Table 5-14 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA...........................................................5-36 Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500..................................................................................6-4 Table 7-1 Service level.......................................................................................................................................7-10 Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services.......................................................................................................7-10 Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services............................................................................7-12 Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service...............................................................................7-13 Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service........................................................................7-14 Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services.................................................................................................................7-15 Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services................................................................................................................7-17 Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services..............................................................................................................7-18 Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services..................................................................................................................7-19 Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels.........................................................................................................................7-21 Table 7-11 Attributes of service association......................................................................................................7-22 Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes.................................................................................................7-24 Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards....................................................................................8-2 Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters...................................................................................................................8-3 Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units......................................................8-4 Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit........................................................................................8-4 Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards.....................................................................................8-5 Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards..........................................................................................8-6 Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX..............................................................................8-7 Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters........................................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.................................................8-9 Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters........................................................................................................................8-10 Table 8-11 SNCP parameters.............................................................................................................................8-13 Table 12-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................................................12-3 Table 12-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................12-4 Table 12-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................12-4 Table 12-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................12-5 Table 12-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................12-6 Table 12-6 Specifications of the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................12-6 Table 12-7 Specifications of the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................12-7 Table 12-8 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces......................................12-8 Table 12-9 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................12-9
xii
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Tables
Table 12-10 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces................................................................................12-10 Table 12-11 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................12-11 Table 12-12 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................12-11 Table 12-13 Laser safety class..........................................................................................................................12-12 Table 12-14 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces..................................................................................12-13 Table 12-15 DDN interface types.....................................................................................................................12-13 Table 12-16 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface.......................................................................................12-14 Table 12-17 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces.......................................................................................12-14 Table 12-18 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces.......................................................................................12-15 Table 12-19 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface...........................................................................12-15 Table 12-20 Clock features...............................................................................................................................12-16 Table 12-21 Timing and synchronization performance....................................................................................12-16 Table 12-22 Transmission performance...........................................................................................................12-17 Table 12-23 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)....................................................................................12-17 Table 12-24 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)..................................................................................12-17 Table 12-25 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.............................................................................12-18 Table 12-26 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack..........................................................12-18 Table 12-27 Power supply specifications.........................................................................................................12-18 Table 12-28 EMC test results...........................................................................................................................12-19 Table 12-29 Safety certifications......................................................................................................................12-20 Table 12-30 Environment specifications for long-term operation...................................................................12-21 Table 12-31 Climate requirements for storage.................................................................................................12-22 Table 12-32 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage......................................12-23 Table 12-33 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage..........................................12-23 Table 12-34 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage.....................................................................12-24 Table 12-35 Climate requirements for transportation......................................................................................12-24 Table 12-36 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation...........................12-25 Table 12-37 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation...............................12-25 Table 12-38 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation..........................................................12-26 Table 12-39 Requirements for temperature and humidity................................................................................12-26 Table 12-40 Other climatic requirements.........................................................................................................12-27 Table 12-41 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance...............................................12-27 Table 12-42 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation......................................12-28 Table 12-43 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation.................................................................12-28 Table A-1 Power consumption and weight of the boards....................................................................................A-1 Table B-1 ITU-T recommendations.....................................................................................................................B-2 Table B-2 IEEE standards....................................................................................................................................B-4 Table B-3 IETF standards....................................................................................................................................B-5 Table B-4 ANSI related standards.......................................................................................................................B-5 Table B-5 Environment related standards............................................................................................................B-5 Table B-6 EMC related standards........................................................................................................................B-6 Table B-7 Safety compliance related standards...................................................................................................B-7 Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd xiii
Tables
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table B-8 Protection related standards................................................................................................................B-7 Table B-9 ASON related standards......................................................................................................................B-8 Table C-1 SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates........................................................................................C-2 Table C-2 SOH bytes description........................................................................................................................C-5 Table C-3 VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-xc POH bytes description.....................................................................................C-6 Table C-4 VC-12 POH bytes description............................................................................................................C-7 Table C-5 The meanings of the bytes in the MPLS encapsulation format........................................................C-12 Table C-6 TPID settings....................................................................................................................................C-14
xiv
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document describes the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of network application, functions, hardware and software structure, and features.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX OSN 3500 Version V100R008
Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document is network planning engineer.
Organization
This document is organized as follows. Chapter 1 Network Application 2 Function Description Describes the OptiX OSN 3500 and its position in the network. This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of capacity, interface, boards, OAM and other functions. Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd 1
3 Hardware
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
About This Document
Chapter 4 Software
Description Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 3500. It includes intelligent software, board software, NE software and NM software. Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of function, application and protection. This chapter describes the DCN feature supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of service classes and application. Describes protection modes (including equipment level and network level) and characteristics supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. This chapter describes the clock function of the OptiX OSN 3500. This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of maintenance and centralized management. This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of safe operation. This chapter describes the hardware dimension, interface specifications, transmission performance, environment requirements and power specification for the OptiX OSN 3500. This appendix lists the power consumption and weight of the boards that are configured on the OptiX OSN 3500. This appendix lists international standards to which the OptiX OSN 3500 conforms in terms of design and performance. This appendix lists the basic principle of several technologies which the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts. This appendix lists the terms used in this document. The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document.
5 Data Features
6 DCN Features 7 ASON Features 8 Protection
9 Clock 10 OAM
11 Security Management 12 Technical Specifications
A Power Consumption and Weight of Boards B Compliant Standards
C Basic Principle D Glossary E Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
About This Document
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows. Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
WARNING
CAUTION
TIP
NOTE
General Conventions
Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
Convention Boldface Italic [] Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italic. Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
About This Document
Convention { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... } *
Description Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected. Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
GUI Conventions
Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation
Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operation
Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
About This Document
Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R008

This document of the V100R008 version is of the third release. Compared with issue 02, issue 03 has the following optimized content.
l l
Optimize the figures. Several bugs are fixed.

This document of the V100R008 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01, issue 02 has the following revised or optimized content.
l
Chapter 10 OAM is optimized, and chapter 11 Security Management is added.

This document of the V100R008 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R007, this version has the following new or optimized content:
l
The description is added for the N4GSCC, N1EAS2, N1SLQ16, N1SLQ4A, N1SLD4A, N1SL4A, N1SLQ1A, N1SL1A, and N2BPA boards. The following sections are added: 2.19 NSF Function, 7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and 7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane. The description about DCC allocation modes is modified in 6.1 Overview. Perfect B Compliant Standards, describes the standards and protocols complied with by the OSN equipment.
l l

This document of the V100R007 version is of the third release. Compared with issue 02, issue 03 has the following revised or optimized content.
l l l l l
The N3EGS4 board is added. 7.4 ASON Clock Tracing is added. In 2.9 ASON Features and 2.21 Clock, the description of ASON clock is added. In 2.14 Software Package Loading, the description of proliferated loading is added. Several bugs are fixed.

This document of the V100R007 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01, issue 02 has the following revised or optimized content.
l
The access capacity in 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity is rectified.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd 5
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
About This Document

l l l
Related information on the N1SL16A and N2SL16A is supplemented. In 8.2.3 SNCP, the number SNCP protection pairs is increased. In 12.8 Power Supply Specification, the Max. power consumption and current are rectified. In A Power Consumption and Weight of Boards, the power and weight is updated. 12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility, 12.11 Environmental Specification and 12.12 Environment Requirement are revised. The interface type, BNC is all changed to SMB. The mapping relation between boards and slots is optimized in 3.3.2 Slot Allocation.
l l
l l

This document of the V100R007 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R006, this version has the following new or optimized content:
l
Description of the N1SLD64, N1SLD16, N3SL16, N3SL16A, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4 is added. Sections of the new features are added.

Section "Intelligent Optical Power Adjustment" Section "External Clock Output Shutdown Function" 2.14 Software Package Loading 2.15 Hot Patch 2.16 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression 2.17 PRBS Function 2.18 Board Version Replacement

The updated contents are as follows. Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.

The updated contents are as follows. Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.

This document of the V100R006 version is of the first release.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
1 Network Application
1
l l l l l l l l
Network Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 is new generation equipment developed by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd (hereinafter referred to as Huawei). The OptiX OSN 3500 transmits voice and data services on the same platform with high efficiency. It integrates the following technologies: Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) Ethernet Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) Storage area network (SAN) Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) Digital data network (DDN) Automatically switched optical network (ASON)
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
1-1
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500
The OptiX OSN 3500 is mainly used at the convergence layer and the backbone layer of the metropolitan area network (MAN). The OptiX OSN 3500 can also be networked with the other OSN equipment to optimize the investment and to lower the networking costs for customers. The OptiX OSN 3500 can be networked with the following equipment:
l l l l l l
OptiX OSN 9500 OptiX OSN 7500 OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500
Figure 1-2 shows the application of the OptiX OSN 3500 in a transmission network.
1-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 9500 OptiX OSN 7500 Backbone layer OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 3500 Convergence layer OptiX OSN 2500 Access layer
OptiX OSN 1500
GSM/CDMA
PSTN
Ethernet
...
ATM
SAN
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN) Storage Area Network (SAN) Ethernet
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
1-3
2 Function
2
About This Chapter
The equipment has many functions. 2.1 Capacity The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
Function
2.2 Service The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services. 2.3 Interface The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces. 2.4 Networking The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used for several network topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, ring with chain, DNI, Hub and mesh network. 2.5 Built-in WDM Technology The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber. 2.6 Extended Subrack The OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services and 24 x E3/T3 services. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N8) TPS protection for E1/T1 services and 1:N (N3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services. 2.7 Board REG Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the board REG function. 2.8 Protection The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection. 2.9 ASON Features The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources. 2.10 TCM The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors. 2.11 E13/M13 Function
Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd 2-1
2 Function
The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals into one E3/T3 signal or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the E13/M13 function. 2.12 RPR The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut or a link failure. 2.13 ETH-OAM The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployed services, locate network faults, and so on. 2.14 Software Package Loading The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the software package loading function. 2.15 Hot Patch The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot patch technology. 2.16 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board. 2.17 PRBS Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function. 2.18 Board Version Replacement The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board. 2.19 NSF Function The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the board software and network processor (NP) software. 2.20 OAM Information Interworking The OptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking. 2.21 Clock The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock functions. 2.22 OAM The OptiX OSN 3500 provides maintenance and management functions. 2.23 Security Management The T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE.
2-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity. 2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity The OptiX OSN 3500 provides cross-connect boards of different cross-connect capacities. 2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity With different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 3500 provides different slot access capacities.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides cross-connect boards of different cross-connect capacities. The OptiX OSN 3500:
l l l
The N1GXCSA board, which is a general cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The N1EXCSA board, which is an enhanced cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The N1UXCSA/N1UXCSB board, which is an ultra cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The N1SXCSA/N1SXCSB board, which is a super cross-connect and synchronous timing board. The N1IXCSA/N1IXCSB board, which is an infinite cross-connect and timing synchronous board. The N1XCE board, which is a lower order cross-connect board for the extended subrack.
Table 2-1 lists the cross-connect capacity of each cross-connect board for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 Board Higher Order Cross-Connect Capacity 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4) Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity 5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4, equivalent to 96 x 96 VC-3 or 2016 x 2016 VC-12) 5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4, equivalent to 96 x 96 VC-3 or 2016 x 2016 VC-12) Access Capacity of Single Subrack 35 Gbit/s (224 x 224 VC-4) Remarks
N1GXCSA
Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack.
N1EXCSA
80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4)
58.75 Gbit/ s (376 x 376 VC-4)
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2-3
2 Function
Board
Higher Order Cross-Connect Capacity 80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4)
Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4, equivalent to 384 x 384 VC-3 or 8064 x 8064 VC-12) 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4, equivalent to 384 x 384 VC-3 or 8064 x 8064 VC-12) 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4, equivalent to 384 x 384 VC-3 or 8064 x 8064 VC-12) 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4, equivalent to 384 x 384 VC-3 or 8064 x 8064 VC-12) 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4, equivalent to 768 x 768 VC-3 or 16128 x 16128 VC-12) 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4, equivalent to 768 x 768 VC-3 or 16128 x 16128 VC-12) 1.25 Gbit/s (8 x 8 VC-4, equivalent to 24 x 24 VC-3 or 504 x 504 VC-12)
Access Capacity of Single Subrack 58.75 Gbit/ s (376 x 376 VC-4)
Remarks
N1UXCSA
Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack.
N1UXCSB
80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4)
60 Gbit/s (384 x 384 VC-4)
Used for the main subrack and for connection to the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack.
N1SXCSA
200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4)
155 Gbit/s (992 x 992 VC-4)
N1SXCSB
200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4)
156.25 Gbit/s (1000 x 1000 VC-4) 155 Gbit/s (992 x 992 VC-4)
Used for the main subrack and for connection to the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack.
N1IXCSA
200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4)
N1IXCSB
200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4)
156.25 Gbit/s (1000 x 1000 VC-4) 1.25 Gbit/s (8 x 8 VC-4)
Used for the main subrack and for connection to the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Used for the extended subrack.
XCE
2-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity

With different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 3500 provides different slot access capacities. For details, see Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5. Figure 2-1 Access capacity of each slot when the N1GXCSA board is used
FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 FAN S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 FAN S L O T 1 5 S L O T 1 6 S L O T 1 7 S L O T 1 8
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
N1GXCSA
N1GXCSA
2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s
S L O T 1 4 S L O T 1 5
622Mbit/s 1.25Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s
Fiber Routing
Figure 2-2 Access capacity of each slot when the N1EXCSA board is used
FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 FAN S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 FAN S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 8 6 or
N1EXCSA
1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
N1EXCSA
1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
GSCC
Fiber routing
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
GSCC
GSCC GSCC
2-5
2 Function
Figure 2-3 Access capacity of each slot when the N1UXCSA/B board is used
FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 FAN S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 FAN S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8 or
N1UXCSA/B
N1UXCSA/B
1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s
GSCC
Fiber routing
Figure 2-4 Access capacity of each slot when the N1SXCSA/B board is used
FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 FAN S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 FAN S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8
N1SXCSA/B
Fiber routing
Figure 2-5 Access capacity of each slot when the N1IXCSA/B board is used
FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9 FAN S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 FAN S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8
N1SXCSA/B
N1IXCSA/B
N1IXCSA/B
Fiber routing
2-6
5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s or GSCC GSCC
5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s
20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s
5Gbit/s
5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s
20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s or GSCC GSCC
5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s
GSCC
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services. 2.2.1 Service Type The OptiX OSN 3500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services. 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies according to the type and quantity of the configured boards.
2.2.1 Service Type

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet, RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services. For details about supported service types, refer to Table 2-2. Table 2-2 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Service Type SDH services Description
l l
Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16/64 Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/ VC-4-64c Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC4-Xv (X8), VC3-Xv (X24) SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s E1/T1 service E3/T3 service E4 service Ethernet private line (EPL) service Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service EVPL service EVPLAN service Constant bit rate (CBR) service Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
PDH services
l l l
Ethernet services
l l l l
RPR services
l l
ATM services
l l l l
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2-7
2 Function
Service Type DDN services
Description
l l
N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service Framed E1 service Fiber channel (FC) service Fiber connection (FICON) service Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service
SAN services
l l l l
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity

The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies according to the type and quantity of the configured boards. Table 2-3 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 for accessing different services. The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services that is supported, when only one specific type of service is accessed. Table 2-3 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 Service Type STM-64 standard or concatenated services STM-64 (FEC) services STM-16 standard or concatenated services STM-16 (FEC) services STM-4 standard or concatenated services STM-1 standard services STM-1 (electrical) services E4 services E3/T3 services E1/T1 services FE services GE services 10GE services STM-4 ATM services STM-1 ATM services
2-8
Maximum Number of Services Supported by a Single Subrack 8 4 44 8 46 204 132 32 117 504 180 56 16 15 60
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
Service Type N x 64 kbit/s (N: 131) services Framed E1 services ESCON services FICON/FC100 services FC200 services DVB-ASI services
Maximum Number of Services Supported by a Single Subrack 64 64 44 22 8 44
2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces. 2.3.1 Service Interfaces Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces. 2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces. Table 2-4 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-4 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Interface SDH service interface Description STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz. PDH service interface 75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
2 Function
Interface Ethernet service interface DDN service interface ATM service interface
Description 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1 STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3/ N1PL3/PL3A board IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1/ N1PQM/N2PQ1 board
Storage area network (SAN) service interface
FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces
NOTE
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2 L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2 are technical specifications defined by Huawei.
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces

The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces. Table 2-5 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-5 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Interface Type Administration Description One remote maintenance interface (OAM) Four broadcast data interfaces (S1S4) One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1) One Ethernet interface for network management (ETH) One administration serial interface (F&f) One extended subrack administration interface (EXT) One commissioning interface (COM) Orderwire interface One orderwire phone interface (PHONE) Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2) Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (S1 and S2, used with two broadcast data interfaces)
2-10
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
Interface Type Clock interface
Description Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Alarm interface
16 alarm input and four alarm output interface Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces Alarm concatenation input interface
2.4 Networking
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used for several network topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings, ring with chain, DNI, Hub and mesh network. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of NEs:
l l l
Terminal multiplexer (TM) Add/drop multiplexer (ADM) Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.
NOTE
When the equipment is interconnecting, make sure that the K bytes to be received and transmitted are on the same path at both ends.
l
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide a complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer. Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected with the WDM equipment. Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.
Table 2-6 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-6 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 3500 Networking Mode 1 Chain Topology
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2-11
2 Function
Networking Mode 2 Ring
Topology
Tangent rings
Intersecting rings
Ring with chain
DNI
Hub
2-12
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
Networking Mode 8 Mesh
Topology
Legends:
MADM
ADM
TM
ASON NE
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology

The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the equipment are as follows:
l
Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be added or dropped. The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is supported, and thus multiple waves can be added or dropped. The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the signals are transparently transmitted. Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized. The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the case of these client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate can be monitored. Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms. Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1 inter-board standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms. Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or demultiplexed. Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals over a long distance.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd 2-13
l l
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
l
Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
2.6 Extended Subrack

The OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services and 24 x E3/T3 services. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N8) TPS protection for E1/T1 services and 1:N (N3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services. Each OptiX OSN 3500 subrack supports only one extended subrack. Table 2-7 lists the configuration of the extended subrack. Table 2-7 Configuration of the extended subrack Subrack Cross-connect and synchronous timing board SCC Main Subrack The N1UXCSB, N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board is required. 1 +1 hot backup is recommended. The N1GSCC, N3GSCC or N4GSCC board is required. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. Service processing boards are configured according to the actual requirements. Extended Subrack The N1XCE board is required. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. The SCC board need not be configured. Support N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N1D75S, N1D12S, N1D12B, N1PL3, N1PD3, N1PL3A, N1C34S, N1D34S, N1TSB8, N1TSB4, N1LWX, BA2, BPA, N1DCU, N2DCU. It is required. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. It is required. It is required.
Service processing board
N1PIU, N1PIUA N1AUX FAN
This board is required. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. This board is required. This board is required.
The N1UXCSB board of the main subrack and the N1XCE board of the extended subrack are connected by two cables to achieve 1+1 protection. The EXT interface on the N1AUX board of the main subrack is connected to the "EXT" interface of the N1AUX board of the extended subrack to transmit the network management information. When the N1AUX board is used in an extended subrack, the J9 jumper cap of the N1AUX board should be removed. Figure 2-6 shows the connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack. If the N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board is used, cables are connected in the same way. Replace only the N1UXCSB board in Figure 2-6 with the N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board.
2-14
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
Figure 2-6 Connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack
19 20 21 2223 2425 26 27 28 29 3031 3233 3435 36 37 19 2021 2223 2425 26 27 28 29 3031 3233 3435 36 37
EXT
AUX
FAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FAN 10
FAN 1112 13 14 1516 17 18
FAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FAN 10
FAN 1112 13 14 1516 17 18
UXCSB
UXCSB
GSCC
GSCC
XCE
EXBEXA
EXBEXA
EXBEXA
EXBEXA
XCE
Primary subrack
Extended subrack
2.7 Board REG Function

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the board REG function. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of ADM and REG. See Figure 2-7. Figure 2-7 Hybrid application of ADM and REG
REG SL64 IN OSN 3500 OUT IN IN OUT SL64 IN OSN 3500
SL64 OUT
SL64 OUT
OptiX OSN 3500 IN OSN 3500 OUT IN PQ1 SL16 ADM SL16 SL16 SL16 IN OUT OUT OUT IN OSN 3500
Table 2-8 lists the boards that support the REG function. Table 2-9 lists the types of optical interfaces that are supported.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2-15
AUX
PIU
PIU
PIU
PIU
EXT
2 Function
Table 2-8 Boards that support the REG function Board Slot (40 Gbit/s Cross-Connect Capacity) Slots 8, 11 Slots 6-8, 11-13 Slots 6-8, 11-13 Slot (80 Gbit/s Cross-Connect Capacity) Slots 7-8, 11-12 Slots 5-8, 11-14 Slots 5-8, 11-14 Description
N1SL64, N2SL64 N2SL16, N3SL16 N2SL16A, N3SL16A N1SF64
With the REG mode enabled, the board is in the RS loopback mode and only processes the regeneration section overhead and the frame header. With the REG mode enabled, the board is in the RS loopback mode and only processes the regeneration section overhead, the frame header and FEC overhead.
Slots 8, 11
Slots 7-8, 11-12
Table 2-9 Optical interfaces for the REG Board N1SL64, N2SL64 N1SF64 N2SL16, N3SL16 N2SL16A, N3SL16A Optical Interface Type I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
2.8 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection. 2.8.1 Equipment Level Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes. 2.8.2 Network Level Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes.
2.8.1 Equipment Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes. Table 2-10 shows the equipment level protection provided by the OptiX OSN 3500.
2-16
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
Table 2-10 Equipment level protection Object Protected E1/T1 service processing board E3/T3/E4/STM-1(e) service processing board DDN service processing board Ethernet processing boards N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 Ethernet processing board N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 Ethernet processing board N1EAS2 ATM service processing board Cross-connect and timing unit SCC board Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board N1LWX Protection Scheme 1:N (N8) TPS 1:N (N3) TPS 1:N (N8) TPS 1:1 TPS 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS DLAG Revertive Mode Revertive Revertive Revertive Revertive Non-revertive
l l
Revertive (Default) Non-revertive Revertive (Default) Non-revertive
DLAG
l l
1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Intra-board protection (dualfed and selective receiving) and inter-board protection (1 +1 hot backup) 1+1 hot backup 1:N backup
Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive
-48 V power interface unit +3.3 V board power supply
Non-revertive Non-revertive
NOTE The OptiX OSN 3500 supports coexistence of three TPS protection groups of different types.
2.8.2 Network Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes. Table 2-11 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-11 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Network Level Protection SDH protection
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Protection Scheme Linear MSP

2-17
2 Function
Network Level Protection
Protection Scheme MSP ring Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), subnetwork connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP) Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection Fiber-shared virtual trail protection Optical-path-shared MSP
Ethernet protection ATM protection
Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
2.9 ASON Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources. The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 3500 are as follows:
l l l l
Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration. Supports service level agreement (SLA). Supports mesh networking and protection. Provides traffic engineering control to ensure load-balance traffic network wide and improve the bandwidth availability. Provides distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and preconfiguration. Supports span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the scalability of the network. Provides ASON clock tracing.
NOTE
The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 3500 according to the requirement. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the intelligent features described in this manual.
2.10 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors. If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the bit errors of each section. The N2SL1, N2SLQ1, N2SLO1, N2SL4, N2SLD4, N2SLQ4, N2SL16, N3SL16, N2SL16A, N3SL16A and N2SL64 boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.
2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2 Function
2.11 E13/M13 Function

The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals into one E3/T3 signal or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the E13/M13 function. The E13/M13 function has two modes: Transmux and Transmux Server. These two modes are described as follows:
l
The remote NE transmits the E1/E3 or T1/T3 services in VC-12/VC-3 granularities to the central NE over the SDH line. The central NE disassembles the received services into E1/T1 granularities.

For E1/T1 services, the central NE directly demaps VC-12 signals into E1/T1 signals. For E3/T3 services, the central NE first demaps VC-3 signals into E3/T3 signals. Then, the E13/M13 function is performed to demultiplex E3/T3 signals into E1/T1 signals.
The central NE first grooms E1/T1 signals, and then by using the E13/M13 function, aggregates and reassembles these E1/T1 signals to E3/T3 signals. Then, the E3/T3 signals are output.
If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to the local application equipment through electrical interfaces, the mode is referred to as the Transmux mode. If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to anoother transmission equipment over the SDH line, the mode is referred to as the Transmux Server mode.
2.12 RPR
The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut or a link failure. The main features of the RPR are as follows:
l l l
Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time. Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels. Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the destination node. Solve the fairness and congestion control problems. Provide RPR protection.
l l
2.13 ETH-OAM
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployed services, locate network faults, and so on. For the OptiX OSN 3500, Ethernet service processing boards provide the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The ETH-OAM function provides a complete ETH-OAM solution to automatically detect and locate faults. The IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM is realized through the following methods:
2 Function
l l l l
The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check. The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point. The continuity check (CC), which is used for a unidirectional continuity check. OAM_Ping test, which is used to test the packet loss ratio and latency in service.
The IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM function is realized through the following methods:
l
Automatic OAM Discovery, which is used to obtain the capability for the opposite end to support the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol. Link performance monitoring, which is used to monitor the bit error performance of the link. Fault detection, which is used to report a fault to the opposite end. Remote loopback, which is used to locate a fault and test the link performance. Self-loop check, which is used to check the self-loop port. Loop shutdown, which is used to block a self-loop port and rectify a port loop.
l l l l
2.14 Software Package Loading

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the software package loading function. The software package loading function supports mass loading of software at NE-level and diffused loading of software at network-level. This function realizes upgrade and management of NE software, simplifies the upgrade operations, and improves the usability of the upgrade operations. The software package loading has the following features:
l l
Users load the software in a uniform operation interface. The complete software package is stored on the compact flash (CF) card of the N3GSCC/ N4GSCC board. If the board software files are lost, these files can be restored from the N3GSCC/N4GSCC board. The automatic matching and loading of software package is supported. If the software version of the in-service board does not match the software package, the board software will be automatically updated. The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load the files required in the current update. The network-level diffused loading feature realizes the synchronous software package loading on the NEs in the entire network. These NEs are configured with the same series of SCC boards.
The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:

l l l l l l
Upgrade of software of an NE Replacement of service boards Replacement of auxiliary boards Replacement of a cross-connect board Replacement of a N3GSCC or N4GSCC board Replacement of the CF card of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC board
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
2-20
2 Function
2.15 Hot Patch

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot patch technology. Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch. The hot patch technology has the following features:
l l
The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services. The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and prevents frequent software version upgrade. The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks. The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves the efficiency of solving problems.
2.16 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board. When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board, many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line board. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem. If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE, and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on the tributary/data board are suppressed. If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at the service source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the tributary/data board are not suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the T2000 and are not mistakenly suppressed.
2.17 PRBS Function

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function. The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service path is faulty. Such analysis can be performed for the NE and the entire network. During deployment or troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a real test device. The PRBS function has the following two types:
2 Function
l
If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a tributary board. If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board.
The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:

l
For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback command on the T2000. On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this path. The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts the statistics. The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result. The user queries the PRBS statistics result. The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.
l l
l l l
2.18 Board Version Replacement

The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board. This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus reduces the equipment cost and the maintenance cost. For OptiX OSN 3500, the board version replacement function is supported by the N1SXCSA, N1SXCSB, N1SL64, N3SL16, N3SL16A, N1SLQ16, N2PQ1, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N2EGS2 and N2EFS4. For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting. When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
l
The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For example, If the N2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services, it cannot be replaced with the N1SL64 board. The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP configured.
2.19 NSF Function

The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the board software and network processor (NP) software. In the NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software and NP software for the N4EFS0 and N2EFS4 boards can be completed after performing a warm reset of the boards. In this case, the service interruption time is less than 50 ms, which meets the carrier-class requirements.
2 Function
CAUTION
If the two versions before and after the upgrade have significant differences, the service interruption during the NSF-mode upgrade cannot be controlled within 50 ms, and this ensures only a low service interruption time.
2.20 OAM Information Interworking

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking. Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 3500 to transparently transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 3500.
l l l
HWECC IP over DCC OSI over DCC
2.21 Clock
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock functions.
l l l l l l l
SSM clock protocol Tributary retiming Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input External clock output shutdown Line clock source Tributary clock source Three working modes are as follows:

Tracing mode Holdover mode Free-run mode
ASON clock tracing
2.22 OAM
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides maintenance and management functions. The OptiX OSN 3500 are designed according to the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. It provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers. The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network management system, which can implement monitoring and management over the network equipment.
2 Function
2.23 Security Management

The T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE.
l l l l
Authorization Management Network Security Management System Security Management Log Management
2-24
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
3
About This Chapter
3.3 Subrack The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured. 3.4 Boards The equipment supports different types of boards.
Hardware
3.1 Overview The OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards. 3.2 Cabinet The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access 48 V or 60 V power.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-1
3 Hardware
3.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards. Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment. Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
Cabinet
Subrack
Board
3.2 Cabinet
The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access 48 V or 60 V power.
3 Hardware
Figure 3-2 shows the outer view of an ETSI cabinet. Figure 3-2 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet
H W D
3.3 Subrack
The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured. 3.3.1 Subrack Structure The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area for processing boards, slot area for interface boards, fan area and fiber routing area. 3.3.2 Slot Allocation The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper layer, where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards.
3 Hardware
3.3.1 Subrack Structure

The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area for processing boards, slot area for interface boards, fan area and fiber routing area. Figure 3-3 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
2 3
H W D 4. Fiber routing area
1. Slot area for interface boards
2. Fan area 3. Slot area for processing boards
The functions of these areas are as follows:

l
Slot area for interface boards: This area is used to house the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 3500. Fan area: This area is used to house three fan modules, which dissipate the heat generated by the equipment. Slot area for processing boards: This area is used to house the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500. Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers in the subrack.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation

The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper layer, where 19 slots are available, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slots are available, is the slot area for processing boards. Figure 3-4 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
3 Hardware
Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T 2 7 S L O T 2 8 S L O T 2 9 S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T S L O T
1 2 2 9 0 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 5 6
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P I U FAN SLOT 38 S S S S S S S S
P I U FAN SLOT 39 S S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 FAN SLOT 40 S L O T 1 4 S L O T 1 5 S L O T 1 6
A U X
L L L L L L L L L O O O O O O O O O T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S L O T 1 7 G S C C
S L O T 1 8 G S C C
X C S
X C S
Fiber Routing
Slot Area for Interface Boards

Slots for the interface boards: slots 1926 and 2936
Slot Area for Processing Boards

Slots for the processing boards: slots 18 and 1117
Other Slots
l l l l l
Slots for the cross-connect and timing boards: slots 910 Slots for the SCC boards: slots 1718 (slot 17 can also house a processing board) Slots for the PIU boards: slots 2728 Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 37 Slots for the fan boards: slots 3840
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-5
3 Hardware
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards
Table 3-1 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards. Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards Slots for Processing Boards Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 13 Slot 15 Slots for Interface Boards Slots 19 and 20 Slots 23 and 24 Slots 29 and 30 Slots 33 and 34 Slots for Processing Boards Slot 3 Slot 5 Slot 14 Slot 16 Slots for Interface Boards Slots 21 and 22 Slots 25 and 26 Slots 31 and 32 Slots 35 and 36
3.4 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards. 3.4.1 Board Type The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of some units. 3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards OptiX OSN 3500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards. 3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards. 3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards. 3.4.5 DDN Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN processing boards. 3.4.6 Data Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports data processing boards. 3.4.7 WDM Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards. 3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards. 3.4.9 Auxiliary Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards.
3.4.1 Board Type

The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of some units.
3 Hardware
The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the following units:

l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
SDH interface unit PDH interface unit DDN interface unit Ethernet interface unit Resilient packet ring unit ATM interface unit SAN interface unit WDM unit SDH cross-connect matrix unit Synchronous timing unit SCC unit Overhead processing unit Power input unit Auxiliary interface unit Fan unit
Figure 3-5 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-2 lists the constituent boards and functions of each unit. Figure 3-5 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
SDH/PDH/Ethernet/ ATM/DDN interface board
SDH interface unit
Cross-connect matrix
PDH signal Ethernet signal ATM signal
STM-N optical signal
Synchronous timing unit
Interface unit
Overhead processing
Auxiliary
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
SCC unit
unit
3-7
3 Hardware
Table 3-2 Constituent boards and functions of each unit Unit SDH interface unit Processing board Constituent Board N1SL64, N2SL64, N1SLD64, N1SF64, N1SF16, N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N1SLD16, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, N1SLH1, N2SLO1, N1SLT1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1, N1SEP1, N1SEP N1EU08, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EU04 N1TSB8, N1TSB4 Function
l
Access and process STM-1/STM-4/ STM-16/STM-64 optical signals and VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/ VC-4-64c concatenated optical signals. Access and process STM-16/64 optical signals with FEC.
Interface board Protection switching board PDH interface unit Processing board
Access STM-1 optical/ electrical signals. Provide TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical signals. Access and process E1/ T1, E3/T3 and E4/ STM-1 PDH electrical signals.
N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N1PL3A, N1PQ1, N2PQ3, N1PQM, N2PQ1 N1MU04, N1D34S, N1C34S, N1D75S, N1D12S, N1D12B N1TSB8, N1TSB4 N1DX1, N1DXA DM12
Interface board
Protection switching board DDN interface unit Processing board Interface board
Provide TPS protection for the PDH signals.

l
Access and process N x 64 kbit/s (N: 131) signals and framed E1 signals. Cross-connect the N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side and provide TPS protection for them.
3-8
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Unit Ethernet interface unit Processing board
Constituent Board N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N1EAS2 N1ETF8, N1EFF8 N1ETS8 (with the TPS function), N1TSB8
Function Access and process 10GBASE-LW/LR, 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX, 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-TX Ethernet signals.
Interface board Protection switching board
Provide TPS protection for Ethernet services of the N2EFS0 and the N4EFS0 boards. Access and process 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX, 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-TX Ethernet signals. Support RPR features. Access and process STM-4, STM-1, E3 and IMA E1 ATM signals. Access and transparently transmit SAN services and video services. Add/drop and multiplex any two adjacent wavelengths.
l
RPR unit
Processing board Interface board
N2EMR0, N2EGR2 N1ETF8, N1EFF8
ATM interface unit
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1 N1MST4
SAN interface unit
WDM unit
N1MR2A, N1MR2C, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4 N1LWX
Access signals at arbitrary bit rates (34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s NRZ-coded signals). Convert client-side wavelengths to standard wavelengths that are compliant with ITU-T G.692.
ROP, N1FIB
The N1FIB board filters and isolates the optical signals output from the ROP board.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-9
3 Hardware
Unit SDH cross-connect matrix unit Synchronous timing unit
Constituent Board N1SXCSA, N1SXCSB, N1GXCSA, N1EXCSA, N1UXCSA, N1UXCSB, N1XCEa N1GSCC, N3GSCC, N4GSCC
Function
l
Cross-connect SDH and PDH signals. Provide system clock for the equipment. Perform the system control and communication function. Process overhead of SDH signals.
SCC unit Overhead processing unit
Power interface unit
N1PIU, N1PIUA
Access power supply and protect the equipment against abnormal power. Provide various administration and maintenance interfaces. Dissipate heat for the system. Amplify and preamplify the optical power. Compensate dispersion for STM-64 optical signals.
Auxiliary interface unit
N1AUX
Fan unit Optical booster amplifier and dispersion compensation unit Optical amplifier board Dispersion compensation board
N1FAN TN11OBU1, N1BA2, N1BPA, N2BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA N1DCU, N2DCU
a: The N1XCE is used for the extended subrack.
3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

OptiX OSN 3500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards. Table 3-3 lists the cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-3 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 Board N1GXCSA N1EXCSA Full Name General cross-connect and synchronous timing board Enhanced cross-connect and synchronous timing board Valid Slots Slots 910 Slots 910
3-10
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Board N1UXCSA N1UXCSB N1SXCSA N1SXCSB N1IXCSA N1IXCSB N1XCE N1GSCC, N3GSCC, N4GSCC
Full Name Ultra cross-connect and synchronous timing board Ultra cross-connect and synchronous timing board Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board Super cross-connect and synchronous timing board Infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing board Infinite cross-connect and synchronous timing board Lower order cross-connect board for the extended subrack System control and communication board
Valid Slots Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots in the extended subrack: slots 5960 Slots 1718
3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-4 lists the SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-4 SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 Board N1SLD64 N1SL64, N2SL64 Full Name 2 x STM-64 optical interface board 1 x STM-64 optical interface board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-11
3 Hardware
Board N1SF64
Full Name 1 x STM-64 optical interface board (with FEC)
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11
N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16
4 x STM-16 optical interface board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11
N1SLD16
N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 1114 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 1114 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 68 and 1113
N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16
N1SF16
1 x STM-16 optical interface board (with FEC)
3-12
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Board N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, N1SLQ4A
Full Name 4 x STM-4 optical interface board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, one optical interface can be configured), and slots 68 and 1113 (for the board housed in any of slots 68 and 1113, four optical interfaces can be configured)
N1SLD4, N2SLD4, N2SLD4A
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, one optical interface can be configured), and slots 68 and 1113 (for the board housed in any of slots 68 and 1113, two optical interfaces can be configured)
N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SL4A
N1SLH1
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (for the board housed in any of slots 25 and 1316, 16 optical interfaces can be configured)
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-13
3 Hardware
Board N1SLT1
Full Name 12 x STM-1 optical interface board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, 18 optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, 112 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, 18 optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, 112 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, 14 optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 68 and 1113 (for the board housed in any of slots 68 and 1113, 112 optical interfaces can be configured)
N2SLO1
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (for the board housed in any of slots 18 and 1117, eight optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (for the board housed in any of slots 18 and 1117, eight optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, four optical interfaces can be configured)
N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, N1SLQ1A
N1SL1, N2SL1, N1SL1A
3-14
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Board N1SEP1 (without the interface board) N1SEP (with the interface board) N1EU08
Full Name 2 x STM-1 line processing board
Valid Slots Slots 16 and 1316
8 x STM-1 line processing board 8 x STM-1 electrical interface board
Slots 25 and 1316
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1926 and 2936 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
N1EU04 N1OU08 (LC)
4 x STM-1 electrical interface board 8 x STM-1 optical interface board
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1926 and 2936 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
N2OU08 (SC)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1926 and 2936 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
Interface
Table 3-5 lists the SDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-5 SDH processing boards Board N1SL64, N2SL64 N1SF64 N1SLD64 N1SLD16 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interface Type I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e I-64.1, S-64.2b I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 Connecto r LC LC LC LC
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-15
3 Hardware
Board N1SF16 N2SLQ16 N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4 N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4 N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4 N1SLT1 N1SLH1 N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A N2SLQ1 N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1 N1SEP1a N1SEPa
Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 4 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU04 Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1OU08
Interface Type Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
Connecto r LC LC LC
LC
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
S-1.1 I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC LC LC LC LC
75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface
SMB SMB
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1
LC
3-16
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Board
Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N2OU08 Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU08
Interface Type I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1
Connecto r SC
75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
N2SLO1
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are boards of the same type. If they are used with the interface board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. If the interfaces on their front panels are used, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-6 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-6 PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 Board N1SPQ4 N2SPQ4 N1PL3 Full Name 4 x E1/STM-1 processing board 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board 3 x E3/T3 processing board Valid Slots Slots 25 and 1316 Slots 25 and 1316 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25, 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5255, 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25, 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5255, 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-17
3 Hardware
Board N2PL3
Full Name 3 x E3/T3 processing board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25, 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5255, 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25, 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5255, 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316
N1PL3A
3 x E3/T3 processing board (without the interface board)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155, 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155, 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1116
N2PL3A (without the interface board)
3 x E3/T3 processing board
N1PD3
N2PD3
N2PQ3
Slots 25 and 1316
3-18
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Board N1PQ1
Full Name 63 x E1 processing board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1316
N2PQ1
63 x E1 processing board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1316
N1PQM
N1TSB8
8-channel electrical interface switching board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35, 36 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 69, 85) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35, 36 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 69, 85) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35 and 36
N1TSB4 N1MU04
4-channel electrical interface switching board 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical interface board
Slots 19 and 35 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-19
3 Hardware
Board N1C34S
Full Name 3 x E3/T3 electrical interface switching board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 69, 71, 73, 75, 79, 81, 83 and 85) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 69, 71, 73, 75, 79, 81, 83, and 85) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
N1D34S
6 x E3/T3 electrical interface switching board
N1D75S
32 x E1 electrical interface switching board
N1D12S
N1D12B
3-20
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Interface
Table 3-7 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-7 PDH processing boards Board N1SPQ4 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical interface board N1MU04 Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical interface board N1MU04 Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical interface switching board N1D34S Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical interface switching board N1D34S Interfaces available on the 3 x electrical interface switching board N1C34S Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 3 x electrical interface switching board N1C34S Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical interface switching board N1D34S Interfaces available on the 32channel electrical interface switching board N1D75S Interfaces available on the 32channel electrical interface switching board N1D12S Interfaces available on the 32channel electrical interface switching board N1D75S Interfaces available on the 32channel electrical interface switching board N1D12S Interface Type 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E1 interface Connector SMB
N2SPQ4
SMB
N1PD3
SMB
N2PD3
SMB
N1PL3
SMB
N1PL3A N2PL3
SMB SMB
N2PL3A N2PQ3
SMB SMB
N1PQ1A
DB44
N1PQ1B
120-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N2PQ1A
75-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N2PQ1B
120-ohm E1 interface
DB44
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-21
3 Hardware
Board N1PQM
Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the 32channel electrical interface switching board N1D12S
Interface Type 120-ohm E1 interface, 100ohm T1 interface
Connector DB44
3.4.5 DDN Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN processing boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-8 lists the DDN processing boards and their valid slots. Table 3-8 DDN processing boards and their valid slots Board N1DX1 N1DXA Full Name N x 64 kbit/s convergence board N x 64 kbit/s convergence board Valid Slots Slots 15 and 1316 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1116 N1DM12 N x 64 kbit/s interface board Slots 1926 and 2936
Interface
Table 3-9 lists the DDN processing boards. Table 3-9 DDN processing boards Board N1DX1 Full Name N x 64 kbit/s service access and convergence board N x 64 kbit/s service convergence board Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the N x 64 kbit/s interface board N1DM12 None Interface Type RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V. 24, X.21, Framed E1 None Connector DB28, DB44
N1DXA
None
3-22
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
3.4.6 Data Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports data processing boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-10 lists the data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-10 Data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 Board N1EAS2 Full Name 2 x 10G Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch 4 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 1114 (10 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 1113 (2.5 Gbit/s) N1EMS4 (with the interface board) 4 x GE and 16 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s) N1EMS4 (without the interface board) 4 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 56 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 56 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EGS4, N3EGS4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-23
3 Hardware
Board N2EGS2
Full Name 2 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 1113 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EGT2
2 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 1113 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EFT8 (without the interface board) N1EFT8 (with the interface board)
8 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission board 16 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission board
Slots 16 and 1316 (622 Mbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFT8A
8 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission board (without the interface board) 4 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
N1EFS4
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1116 (622 Mbit/s)
3-24
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Board N2EFS4 (without the interface board)
Full Name 4 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 1113 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS0
8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch 8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
N2EFS0
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N4EFS0
8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (with the interface board)
1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet board with RPR
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (without the interface board)
1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet board with RPR
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 56 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 56 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-25
3 Hardware
Board N2EGR2
Full Name 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 1113 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1ADL4
1 x STM-4 ATM processing board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 68 and 1113 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDL4
1 x STM-4 ATM processing board with IMA
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 1113 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADQ1
4 x STM-1 ATM processing board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 68 and 1113 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDQ1
4 x STM-1 ATM processing board with IMA
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 1113 (1.25 Gbit/s)
3-26
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Board N1MST4
Full Name 4-port multiservice transparent transmission board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1416 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 1113 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EFF8 N1ETF8
8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board
Slots 1926 and 2936 Slots 1926 and 2936
N1ETS8
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
Interface
Table 3-11 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-11 Data processing boards and their interfaces Board N2EGS2 N1EFS0 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board, N1EFF8 N2EFS0 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8 Interface Type 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100Base-TX Connector LC RJ-45
100Base-FX
LC
10/100Base-TX
RJ-45
100Base-FX
LC
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-27
3 Hardware
Board N4EFS0
Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
Interface Type 10/100Base-TX
Connector RJ-45
100Base-FX
LC
N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EGT2 N1EFT8
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX
RJ-45 RJ-45 LC RJ-45 RJ-45
100Base-FX
LC
N1EFT8A N1EMS4
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel and the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8 Interfaces available on the front panel
10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX
RJ-45 RJ-45
100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 10GBASE-LW/ LR 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100Base-TX
LC
LC LC LC LC LC RJ-45
N1EGS4 N3EGS4 N1EAS2 N2EMR0
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8
3-28
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Board
Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board N1EFF8
Interface Type 100Base-FX
Connector LC
N2EGR2 N1ADL4 N1ADQ1 N1IDL4 N1IDQ1 N1MST4
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel
1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 X3.296/(DVBASI) EN50083-9, 200-M5-SN-I, 200-SM-LC-I
LC LC LC LC LC LC
3.4.7 WDM Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-12 lists the WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-12 WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 Board N1LWX Full Name Wavelength converting board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155, 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155, 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1116
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-29
3 Hardware
Board TN11OBU1
Full Name Optical booster amplifier board
N1FIB
Filter isolating board (passive)
N1MR2A
2-channel optical add/ drop multiplexing board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, and 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1116
N1MR2C
TN11MR2
3-30
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3 Hardware
Board TN11MR4
Full Name 4-channel optical add/ drop multiplexing board
TN11CMR2
2-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board
TN11CMR4
4-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board
Interface
Table 3-13 lists the WDM boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-13 WDM boards and their interfaces Board N1MR2A N1MR2B N1MR2C N1LWX TN11MR2 TN11MR4 TN11CMR2 TN11CMR4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel
Connector LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC
3-31
3 Hardware
3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-14 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-14 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 Board N1BA2 Full Name Optical booster amplifier board Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, and 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1116 N1BPA, N2BPA 1-channel amplifier and 1-channel preamplifier board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1116 N1DCU Dispersion compensation board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1116 N2DCU Dispersion compensation board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5158, 6167) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1116
3 Hardware
Board N1COA, 61COA, 62COA ROP
Full Name Case-shaped optical amplifier Single wavelength longhaul board (external)
Valid Slots Slots 101102
Slot 103
NOTE The slots of the N1COA, 61COA, 62COA, and ROP that are displayed on the T2000 are logical slots rather than physical slots.
Interface
Table 3-15 lists the optical booster amplifier boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-15 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces Board N1BA2 N1BPA, N2BPA 61COA N1COA 62COA N1DCU, N2DCU ROP N1FIB TN11OBU1 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Connector LC LC SC SC SC, E2000 LC LC LC, E2000 LC
3.4.9 Auxiliary Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards.
Valid Slots
Table 3-16 lists the auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
3-33
3 Hardware
Table 3-16 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 Board N1AUX Full Name System auxiliary interface board Valid Slots Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slot 37 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 87) Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slot 37 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 87) Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slot 37 N1PIU, N1PIUA PIU board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2728 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 7778) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2728 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 7778) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 27 and 28 N1FAN Fan board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 3840 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 8890) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 3840 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 8890) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 38 and 40
Interface
Table 3-17 lists the auxiliary boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-17 Auxiliary boards and their interfaces Board N1PIU, N1PIUA N1FAN N1AUX Connector Power supply interface None SMB, RJ-45
3-34
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
4 Software
4
About This Chapter
4.1 Overview The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is of a modular structure.
Software
The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 includes NE software and board software.
4.2 Board Software The board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board. 4.3 NE Software The NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE. The NE software also functions as the communication unit between the T2000 system and the boards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can control and manage NEs. 4.4 T2000 System The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). 4.5 ASON Software According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
4-1
4 Software
4.1 Overview
The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is of a modular structure. The software system includes the following modules:
l l l l
Board software (residing in each relevant board) NE software (residing in the SCC board) T2000 software (residing on a T2000 computer) ASON software (contained in the NE software)
The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is as shown in Figure 4-1. Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 3500
T2000 software
ASON software
NE software
Board software
NOTE
l l
The ASON software can interact with the T2000 software directly, but it needs the NE software to intercommunicate with the board software. During the software loading, the ASON software is loaded together with the NE software.
4.2 Board Software

The board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board. The board software receives the commands issued by the NE software and reports the board status to the NE software in the form of performance events and alarms. The board software functions include alarm management, performance management, configuration management, and communication management. The board software directly controls the functional modules in a board and implements specific NE functions that are compliant with ITU-T Recommendations. The board software provides support for the management of boards performed by the NE software.
4 Software
The board software is mainly classified into the line software, the tributary software, the crossconnect software, the data board software, the clock software, and the orderwire software.
4.3 NE Software
The NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE. The NE software also functions as the communication unit between the T2000 system and the boards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can control and manage NEs. In compliance with ITU-T M.3010, the NE software belongs to the element management layer in the telecommunications management network (TMN), and provides NE functions, some coordination functions, and operations system functions at the network element layer. The data communication function implements the communication between the NE and other components (including equipment, the T2000 system, and other NEs). The NE software consists of the following modules:
l l l l l
Real-time multi-task operating system Network side (NS) module Equipment administration module (AM) Communication module Database management module
Real-Time Multi-task Operating System

The real-time multi-task operating system of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE software is responsible for the management of public resources and provides support for the execution of applications. This system provides an application execution environment that is independent of the processor hardware, to separate applications from the processor.
Network Side (NS) Module

The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer. Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
l l l
Qx interface module Command line interface module Security management module
Equipment Administration Module (AM)

The equipment AM is the kernel of the NE software for implementing NE management, and includes the Manager and the Agent. The Manager sends network management operation commands and receives event information. The Agent responds to the network management operation commands sent by the Manager, performs operations to managed objects, and reports events according to the status change of the managed objects.
4 Software
The equipment AM includes the configuration management module, the performance management module, the alarm management module, and the MSP switching management module.
Communication Module
The communication module performs the message communication function (MCF) of the functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. Through the hardware interface provided by the SCC board, the communication module transmits the OAM&P information and exchanges management information between the T2000 system and NEs, and between NEs themselves. This module consists of the network communication module, the serial communication module, and the ECC communication module.
Database Management Module

The database management module is an integral component of the NE software, and consists of the data and the management system. The database, organized as a relational database, includes the network database, alarm database, performance database, and equipment database. The management system manages and accesses the data in the database.
4.4 T2000 System

The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). The T2000 is used as a network management system to implement a uniform management of the optical transmission network, and to maintain all the optical network equipment in the network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment. The T2000 software manages OptiX equipment through the Qx interface, which adopts a management protocol specially designed for the OptiX equipment. The T2000 software runs on a workstation or a PC. The T2000 enables the user not only to operate and maintain the transmission equipment, but also to manage the transmission network.
l
Alarm management
The T2000 realizes the following alarm management functions: real-time collection, prompting, filtering, browsing, acknowledgement, check, clearing, counting, alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis, and fault diagnosis.
l
Performance management
The T2000 realizes the setting of performance monitoring, and enables the user to browse, analyze, and print performance data. The short-term and long-term performance forecast and the performance register reset are also supported.
l
Configuration management
The T2000 enables the user to configure and manage interfaces, clocks, services, trails, protections, and time.

l
4 Software
Security management
The T2000 realizes NM user management, NE user management, NE login management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout, and local craft terminal (LCT) access control.
l
Maintenance management
The T2000 provides the loopback, board reset, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and optical power detection, and data collection functions, to help the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.
4.5 ASON Software

According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane. The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is where the ASON software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol), OSPF-TE (open shortest path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation protocol-traffic engineering) protocols. Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly includes the link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and the cross-connection management module. Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture
AOSN software
T2000
Signaling module Cross-connection management module Routing module
NE software
LMP link management module
Link Management Module

By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following functions:
l l
Create and maintain control channels. Verify member links and TE links.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd 4-5
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
4 Software
Signaling Module
By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following functions:
l l
Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests. Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.
Routing Module
By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
l l l
Collect and flood the TE link information. Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane. Compute service trails and control the routing.
Cross-Connection Management Module

The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
l l
Create and delete cross-connections. Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.
4-6
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
5
About This Chapter
Data Features
The data features include Ethernet features, RPR features, ATM features, SAN features and DDN features. 5.1 Ethernet Features This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 3500. 5.2 RPR Features This section describes the functions, application and protection of the RPR features of the OptiX OSN 3500. 5.3 ATM Features This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500. 5.4 SAN Features The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services. 5.5 DDN Features This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-1
5 Data Features
5.1 Ethernet Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 3500. 5.1.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service requirements. 5.1.2 Application The OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. 5.1.3 Protection OptiX OSN 3500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service requirements. Table 5-1 lists the Ethernet functions of the EFS0 and EFS4 boards. Table 5-2 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS2 board. Table 5-3 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS4 board. Table 5-4 lists the Ethernet functions of the EMS4 board. Table 5-5 lists the Ethernet functions of the EAS2 board. Table 5-6 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT8A boards. Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0 Function Interface Interface type Interface board N1EFS4 4 FE N2EFS4 4 FE N1EFS0 8 FE N2EFS0 8 FE N4EFS0 8 FE
10Base-T, 100Base-TX None None
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX N1ETF8, N1EFF8 N1ETS8 (used with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8
Service frame format JUMBO frame Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping mode
5-2
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported, 9600 bytes 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x12)

Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
Function Number of VCTRUNKs Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation Link state pass through (LPT) Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Committed access rate (CAR) Intra-board link aggregation Flow control Test frame Ethernet OAM
N1EFS4 12 Supported Supported
N2EFS4 24
N1EFS0 12
N2EFS0 24
N4EFS0 24
Supported Not supported
MartinioE label supported Supported Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p Supported Supported
GFP-F (FrameMapped GFP) Supports P2P LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT Supports P2P LPT Supports P2P LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported
In compliance with IEEE 802.3x Supported Not supported Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah Not supported Not supported Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-3
5 Data Features
Function Ethernet performance monitoring NSF Function RMON
N1EFS4 Supported
N2EFS4
N1EFS0
N2EFS0
N4EFS0
Not supported Supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2 Function Interface Interface type Interface board Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR
5-4
N2EGS2 2 GE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX None In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x12) 48 Supported Supported Supported Not supported MartinioE label supported Supported Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p Supported Supported GFP-F Supports P2P LPT In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
5 Data Features
Function QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping Flow control Test frame Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM RMON Link aggregation
N2EGS2 Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow. Supported Supported In compliance with IEEE 802.3x Supported Supported
Not supported Supported Supports manual link aggregation
Table 5-3 Function list of EGS4 Function Interface Interface type Interface board Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label N1EGS4 4 x GE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX None In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9216 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x24), VC-4-xv (x8) 64 Supported Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services. Supported Supported Not supported N3EGS4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-5
5 Data Features
Function VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation LPT LCAS BPS PPS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping Flow control Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM Test frame Link aggregation
N1EGS4
N3EGS4
Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supported Supported
GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC Supports P2P and P2MP LPT In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Supported Supported Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow. Supported Supported Supports flow control based on GE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x. Supported Supports P2P LPT
Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah Supported Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-4 Function list of EMS4 Function Interface Interface type Interface board Service frame format
5-6
N1EMS4 4 GE and 16 FE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX Supports 4 x GE if not used with an interface board. Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if used with interface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8. In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
Function JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation LPT LCAS BPS/PPS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping Flow control Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM Test frame Link aggregation
N1EMS4 Supported, 9216 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x24), VC-4-xv (x8) 64 Supported Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services. Supported Supported Not supported Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supported Supported GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC Supports P2P and P2MP LPT In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Supported Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow. Supported Supported Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x. Supported
Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah Supported Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and distributed link aggregation.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-7
5 Data Features
Table 5-5 Function list of EAS2 Function Interface Interface type Interface board Service frame format JUMBO frame Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP Snooping) Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping Flow control N1EAS2 2 x 10 GE 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR None In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9216 bytes 64 VC-4 VC-3-xv (x24), VC-4-xv (x8), VC4-4C contiguous concatenation 24 Supported Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services. Supported Supported Not supported Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supported Supported GFP-F Supports P2P and P2MP LPT In compliance with ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supports port flow, port+CVLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow. Supported Supported In compliance with IEEE 802.3X
5-8
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
Function Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM Test frame Link aggregation
N1EAS2 Supported Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag Supported Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation, and distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-6 Function list of EGT2, EFT8, and EFT8A Function Interface Interface type N1EGT2 2 GE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX None N1EFT8 16 FE 10Base-T, 100BaseTX, 100Base-FX Supports 8 x FE if it is not used with an interface board. Supports 16 x FE if it is used with interface boards, for example, N1ETF8 and N1EFF8. N1EFT8A 8 FE 10Base-T, 100Base-TX None
Interface board
Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-xv (x24), VC-4-xv (x8) 2 Supported by the latter four ports, 9600 bytes 8 VC-4 4 VC-4
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x3) 16 8
Number of VCTRUNKs Ethernet service types MPLS VLAN Encapsulation LPT LCAS
Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported Not supported Transparent transmission GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC Supports P2P LPT In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-9
5 Data Features
Function CAR Flow control Test frame Ethernet OAM Ethernet performance monitoring
N1EGT2 Not supported
N1EFT8
N1EFT8A
In compliance with IEEE 802.3X Supported Not supported Supported
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l l l l
EPL Service EVPL Service EPLAN Service EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH selfhealing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services. Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port
B PORT2 PORT1 A VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK 1 PORT2 POTR1 A B
NE 1 OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user
NE 2
EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.

l
5 Data Features
Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Companie A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs. Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services
Headquarters of company A VLAN100 VLAN200 PORT1 VCTRUNK2 Department 1 VCTRUNK1 VLAN100 PORT1 VLAN200 PORT2 Department 2
NE 1
NE 2
OptiX OSN equipment
Enterprise user
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 3500 adopts three ways to realize convergence and distribution of EVPL services.

EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3. EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4. EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID

B VLAN200 VLAN100 A PORT 1 PORT2 PORT2 VCTRUNK VLAN200 VLAN100 PORT 1 A' B'
NE 1 Community user Cyber cafe user
NE 2 OptiX OSN equipment
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-11
5 Data Features
Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS

Add label PE Department B PORT2 VCTRUNK1 Department A Branch 1 PORT1 ` Department A Branch 2 P P Strip label PE PORT2 Department B
NE 1
NE 2
PORT1
Company A
OptiX OSN equipment
Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ

Add label C-Aware Department B Department A Branch 1 PORT2 VCTRUNK1 PORT1 NE 1 S-Aware Strip label S-Aware C-Aware PORT2 Department B Department A Branch 2
`
NE 2 PORT1
Company A
OptiX OSN equipment
EPLAN Service
Though the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service. Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets accessed select the mapping VCTRUNK according to the MAC address table, as shown in Figure 5-6.
5-12
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
Figure 5-6 EPLAN service
PORT1
VB Port 1 1 Department 3 of company A NE3
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VB PORT1 VB VCTRUNK1 VCTRUNK1
PORT1
Port 1 NE 1 Department 1 of company A Access point Company A NE 2
Port 1 Department 2 of company A OptiX OSN equipment
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and support for the data packets accessed into the same VLAN. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the service requirements. As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopt VB+SVLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-13
5 Data Features
Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service

PORT2 PORT1
Department 3 of company B
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
VB
Department 3 of company A Port 2 VCTRUNK2
Port 1
C-Aware NE3
S-Aware
VCTRUNK1 C-Aware PORT2 PORT1
VB
S-Aware NE 1
C-Aware LSP LSP NE 2 LSP Port 1 Port 2 Department 2 of company B S-Aware
VB
PORT2 PORT1
VCTRUNK1 Port 2
VCTRUNK2 Port 1
Department 1 of company A
Department 1 of company B Company A
Department 2 of company A
Acess point
Company B
OptiX OSN equipment
5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 3500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services. The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:
l l l l l l l l
LCAS STP/RSTP Tributary protection switching (TPS) Board protection switching (BPS) Port protection switching (PPS) Link aggregation group (LAG) DLAG LPT
LCAS
The LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the virtual concatenation function. The LCAS has the following functions:

l
5 Data Features
When the LCAS is applied in the virtual concatenation technology, the LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the concatenated VC quantity, and the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged during the dynamic change). The LCAS protects and restores failed members.
As shown in Figure 5-8, the LCAS can dynamically add or delete members to increase or decrease the bandwidth. Services are not interrupted during this bandwidth adjustment. Figure 5-8 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS
I want another 10 M bandwidth. MSTP network
Member
Member Branch
Headquarters
Member
Branch
Member New member
Headquarters
OptiX NE
As shown in Figure 5-9, the LCAS realizes the protection of the Ethernet service. When some members fail, the faulty members are automatically deleted, whereas other members transmit data normally. When the faulty members are available again, they are automatically restored, and the data is loaded to these members again.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-15
5 Data Features
Figure 5-9 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS

MSTP network Member
Member Branch Failed member
Headquarters
Member Member Branch Delete failed member
Headquarters
OptiX NE
STP/RSTP
The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology.
TPS
The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures a reliable operation of the equipment. The OSN 3500 supports two groups of 1:1 TPS protection for the N2EFS0 or N4EFS0 board.
BPS
The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the services from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection. The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support BPS.
PPS
The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure,
5 Data Features
the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching for the entire board is not necessary. Compared with the BPS, the PPS has lesser impact on external systems and the network. The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the PPS.
LAG
A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regarded as one link. The LAG provides the following functions:
l
Improves the link availability. In an LAG, members dynamically back up each other. When one link is interrupted, other members quickly replace the link to provide services. Adds the link bandwidth. The LAG is an economical method for the user to increase the link transmission rate. When multiple physical links are bundled, the user is able to obtain a data link of higher bandwidth, without an upgrade of the existing equipment. The capacity of an LAG is equal to the sum of the capacity of all the member links. Balances load. Multiple physical links in an LAG share the traffic load and back up each other. Improves the reliability. Members in an LAG dynamically back up each other.
The LAG has three modes: dynamic aggregation, manual aggregation, and static aggregation. For details, refer to C.4 Link Aggregation. The N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N3EAS2 boards support link aggregation, and currently support only manual aggregation and static aggregation.
DLAG
The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is the protection board. During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node is between two equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated node should support the transparent transmission of the protocol packets. The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive.
l
Revertive mode
If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board. When the working board is restored, the DLAG is automatically switched to the working board.
l
Non-revertive mode
If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board. When the working board is restored, the DLAG is not automatically switched to the working board unless the protection board becomes faulty. The N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EAS2 boards support distributed link aggregation.
5 Data Features
LPT
The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby port. Thus, these services are protected. The LPT function includes P2P and P2MP LPT.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 8.2.2 MSP Ring and 8.2.3 SNCP.
5.2 RPR Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the RPR features of the OptiX OSN 3500. The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-10. The outer ring and the inner ring transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth utilization. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The two rings protect each other. Figure 5-10 RPR ring
Node 1
Outer ring data Outer ring control
Node 2
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Inner ring data Inner ring control
Node 3
5.2.1 Functions The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm. 5.2.2 Application The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
5 Data Features
5.2.3 Protection The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes.
5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
Basic Functions
The EMR0 and EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the RPR features defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 5-7 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards. Table 5-7 Function list of RPR boards Function Interface Service frame format JUMBO frame Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping granularity EVPL EVPLAN Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN Spanning tree Multicast listening (IGMP Snooping) RPR protection N2EMR0 1 GE and 12 FE N2EGR2 2 GE
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s) VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-xv (X8) Supported Supported MartinioE label supported Supported Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports RSTP and STP Supported Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protection schemes, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms. GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041. LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86.
Encapsulation
LCAS CAR Flow control
Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.) Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-19
5 Data Features
Function QoS traffic classification Intra-board link aggregation Weighted fairness algorithm Topology auto-discovery Maximum number of nodes Service class
N2EMR0
N2EGR2
The N2EM40 and N2EGR2 boards support traffic classification based on port, port+VLAN ID or port+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI. Supported Supported Supported 255 Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR and C
Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses. Table 5-8 lists the differences among these classes. Table 5-8 RPR service class Class A Subclass A0 A1 B B_CIR B_EIR C C Bandwidth Pre-allocated, irreclaimable Pre-allocated, reclaimable Pre-allocated, reclaimable Preemptible, not pre-allocated Preemptible, not pre-allocated Jitter Low Low Medium High High Fairness Algorithm Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Relevant Relevant Application Real-time services Real-time services Near real-time services Near real-time services Best effort transmission
Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network. Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.
5 Data Features
To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting the existing services.
Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-11, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth utilization is improved. Figure 5-11 Spatial reuse
Node 1 Traffic 1 1.25 Gbit/s
Node 2
Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Bandwidth of single ring is 1.25Gbit/s Node 3
Traffic 2 1.25 Gbit/s
Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits lower-class services on the inner ring and the outer ring. As shown in Figure 5-12, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class services is 1.2 Gbit/ s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1. Figure 5-13 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-21
5 Data Features
Figure 5-12 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1

Node Node2 Node3 Node4 Node 1 Weight 1 1 1
3 2 Node 2 Node 3 1 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 5 Node 6
Traffic 1 2 3
Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s
Figure 5-13 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different

Node Node2 Node3 Node4 Node 1 Weight 1 3 2
3 2 Node 2 Node 3 1 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 5 Node 6
Traffic 1 2 3
Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 600 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s
5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format. Figure 5-14 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet. Figure 5-15 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1.
5 Data Features
Figure 5-14 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 2 Node 4
FE/GE
FE/GE
LSP Action Tunnel VC Destination Insertion 100 100 Node 4 Action Forwarding Node 3
Action Tunnel VC
Stripping 100 100
Figure 5-15 EVPL service convergence

VLAN 2 VLAN 3 Traffic Port1+VLAN 2 Port1+VLAN 3 Port1+VLAN 4 VLAN 4 GE Tunnel 200 300 400 VC 200 300 400 Destination Node 2 Node 3 Node 4
Node 1
FE VLAN 2 Node 2 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 3 Node 4
FE VLAN 4
FE
VLAN 3
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.
5 Data Features
Figure 5-16 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards packets in the same way. Figure 5-16 RPR EVPLAN service
A1 A2 MAC forwarding table of node 1 Port 2 Port 1 MAC A1 A2 B1 B1 Node 1 Dual-ring A2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 2 B2 Port 2 MAC forwarding table of node 2 Node 3 MAC A1 A2 Port 1 C1 B1 B2 C1 Port rpr1 rpr1 port 1 port 2 rpr1 stack VLAN 100 100 none none 100 Node 4 B2 C1 Port port 1 port 2 rpr1 rpr1 rpr1 stack VLAN none none 100 100 100
Port 1
5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes. The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
l l l l
Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering LCAS RSTP Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP
Wrapping
When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth.
5 Data Features
Figure 5-17 illustrates the wrapping protection. The traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, they perform an automatic loopback to connect the inner ring and the outer ring, so that the protection is realized. Figure 5-17 Wrapping protection
Node 2 Fiber cut Traffic flow
Node 3 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 1
Node 4
Node 6
Node 5
Steering
In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated. Figure 5-18 illustrates the steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, the topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology. On the basis of this new topology, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the inner ring.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-25
5 Data Features
Figure 5-18 Steering protection

Node 2 Fiber cut Traffic flow before switching
Node 3
Node 1
Node 4
Traffic flow after switching
Node 6
Node 5
Wrapping+Steering
In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology, the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination through the best route. This reduces the waste of bandwidth. Figure 5-19 illustrates the wrapping+steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, a wrapping switching is first performed so that Nodes 2 and 3 are automatically loopbacked. After the topology autodiscovery protocol discovers a new topology, a steering switching is performed. As a result, the traffic passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the inner ring.
5-26
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
Figure 5-19 Wrapping+steering protection

Node 2 Fiber cut Traffic flow
Node 3 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 1
Node 4
Node 6
Node 5
Node 2 Fiber cut
Node 3
Node 1
Node 4
Traffic flow after switching
Node 6
Node 5
LCAS
The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the bandwidth. For details about the LCAS, refer to section 5.1.3 Protection.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-27
5 Data Features
RSTP
The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.
5.3 ATM Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500. 5.3.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4, and IDQ1. 5.3.2 Application The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services. 5.3.3 Protection The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4, and IDQ1. An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an N1ADQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM services. Table 5-9 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards. Table 5-9 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1 Function Front panel interface Optical interface specification Connector type Optical module type E3 ATM interface IMA
5-28
ADL4 1 x STM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 LC SFP
ADQ1 4 x STM-1 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or N1PL3A board. Not supported
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
Function Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection (ITU-T I.630) OAM function (ITUT I.610)
ADL4 8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4 1.2 Gbit/s VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x4) CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR 2048
ADQ1
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast
Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)
An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services. Table 5-10 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards. Table 5-10 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1 Function Front panel interface Optical interface specification Connector type Optical module type E3 ATM interface N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 LC SFP Not supported N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-29
5 Data Features
Function IMA (compliant with ATM Forum IMA 1.1 standards)
N1IDL4
N1IDQ1
Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1 processing board N1PQ1, N1PQM, or N2PQ1. Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM port. Each IMA group supports 132 E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to the ATM port. Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection (ITU-T I.630) OAM function (ITUT I.610) Board level 1+1 protection
8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4 1 Gbit/s VC-12, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (X4) CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR 2048 IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast
Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check) Supported, with switching time less than 1s
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR services, but does not support ABR services.
l
The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency.
5-30

l l l
5 Data Features
The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate. The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission. The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 3500 meets IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 5-11. Table 5-11 ATM service types and traffic types No. 1 2 Traffic Type atmNoTrafficDescriptor atmNoClpNoScr Service Type UBR UBR.1 CBR 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr atmClpTaggingNoScr atmNoClpScr atmClpNoTaggingScr atmClpTaggingScr atmClpTransparentNoScr atmClpTransparentScr atmNoClpTaggingNoScr atmNoClpNoScrCdvt CBR CBR nrt-VBR.1 nrt-VBR.2 nrt-VBR.3 CBR.1 rt-VBR.1 UBR.2 UBR CBR 12 13 14 atmNoClpScrCdvt atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 rt-VBR.2 rt-VBR.3 Parameter None Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services

When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output. As shown in Figure 5-20, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4 bandwidth. Only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.
5 Data Features
Figure 5-20 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services

DSLAM 34M ATM Traffic Service Convergence
NE 1 155M ATM Traffic NE 2 2.5 Gbit/s SDH Ring NE 4 Router DSLAM
622M ATM Traffic
NE 3
34M ATM Traffic DSLAM
Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services

The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs. As shown in Figure 5-21, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.
5-32
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
Figure 5-21 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to the NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring after converged with local service.
DSLAM NE 1 34M ATM Traffic
155M ATM Traffic VC4-Xv VP/VC-Ring NE 2 DSLAM
NE 4
Router
622M ATM Traffic
NE 3
34M ATM Traffic
DSLAM
Application of IMA Services

The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow. The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently transmitted. Figure 5-22 illustrates the IMA service networking.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-33
5 Data Features
Figure 5-22 IMA service networking
RNC
NE1 T2000 25km NodeB 1 NE2 NE4 40km
STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring
NodeB 4 30km
35km
NE3 NodeB 2
NodeB 3
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers. The protections that are available are as follows:
l l l
ATM layer protections Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards
ATM Layer Protections

Compliant with ITU-T I.630, the ATM layer, protections are classified in different ways, as listed in Table 5-12. You can select a combination of the following protection types as required, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection. Table 5-12 Classification of ATM protection Classification Scheme Bridging function Switching direction Connection level Protection domain Revertive mode Protected object
5-34
Protection Type 1+1 protection Unidirectional protection VPC protection Trail protection Revertive protection Single connection protection 1:1 protection Bidirectional protection VCC protection SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP Non-revertive protection Group connection protection
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
Optical Transmission Layer Protections

The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP. You can set the holdoff time for the ATM protection switching. In this way, when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not performed).
1+1 Board Level Protection for IMA Boards

The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. For the configuration of 1 +1 board level protection, the IDQ1 and IDL4 boards must be inserted in paired slots.
5.4 SAN Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services. The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:
l
The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type. Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and FC200) services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one FC200 service or two FC100 services are supported. The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side. FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km. The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client side. FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km. Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON or 4 x DVB-ASI services. All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).
l l
Table 5-13 lists the service types and bit rates provided by the N1MST4 board. Table 5-13 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4 Service Type FC100/FICON FC200 ESCON DVB-ASI Bit Rate 1062.5 Mbit/s 2125 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s 270 Mbit/s Remarks SAN service SAN service SAN service Video service
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-35
5 Data Features
5.5 DDN Features

This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500. 5.5.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services. 5.5.2 Application When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services. 5.5.3 Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
5.5.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services.
l
The N1DX1 board processes 8 x 64 kbit/s services and eight framed E1 services and realizes the service convergence. The N1DX1 also cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side. The N1DXA board cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side. The N1DM12 board accesses framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services when it works with the N1DX1 board.
l l
Table 5-14 lists the functions and features of the DDN boards. Table 5-14 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA Board Feature Processing capability N1DX1 (N1DM12) Processes 8 x 64 kbit/s and eight framed E1 services, and crossconnects 48 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side. 48 x E1. N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 and X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4. 75 ohms or 120 ohms. N1DXA Cross-connects 63 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.
Bandwidth at SDH side Interface specifications
63 x E1. None.
Interface impedance
None.
5-36
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5 Data Features
Board Feature Connector type
N1DX1 (N1DM12) The connectors are on the DM12 board. The DB28 connector is used for N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is used for framed E1 signals. Supports 1:N TPS protection with the switching time being less than 50 ms. Supports inloop and outloop for all the ports. Supported. A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance.
N1DXA None.
Protection Loopback PRBS self-test Alarm and performance
Not supported. Supports inloop and outloop for all the ports. Not supported. A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance.
5.5.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services. The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so various services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can be accessed to a transmission network.
l l l l
Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Access and convergence of multipoint routers
The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls.
5.5.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides TPS protection for DDN services. In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of the equipment. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports one group of 1:N (N8) TPS protection for the N1DX1 boards.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
5-37
6 DCN Features
6
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several DCN schemes.
DCN Features
6.1 Overview The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs. 6.2 HWECC The equipment supports the HWECC protocol, which is a private protocol defined by Huawei. 6.3 IP Over DCC The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol. 6.4 OSI Over DCC The equipment supports the OSI over DCC protocol.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
6-1
6 DCN Features
6.1 Overview
The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs. In a DCN, the EMS and NEs are regarded as network nodes, which can be connected through Ethernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs). In practical networking, the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a building, in different buildings, or even in different cities. Therefore, the connection between the EMS and NEs usually requires an external DCN that consists of equipment such as LAN switch and routers. On the other hand, the DCN among NEs is referred to as an internal DCN. This section describes the internal DCN that consists of SDH NEs. See Figure 6-1. Figure 6-1 DCN network
T2000
IP/OSI DCN
External DCN
HW ECC or IP/OSI over DCC
Internal DCN
OptiX optical transmission equipment LAN switch
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN With the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult. A stable and robust DCN management network helps reduce the OAM cost. 6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions The OptiX OSN 3500 provides multiple DCN solutions. 6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes The OptiX OSN 3500 supports different DCC resource allocation modes.
6-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
6 DCN Features
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN

With the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult. A stable and robust DCN management network helps reduce the OAM cost. In a DCN, the DCC bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN management. The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels so the network construction cost is considerably reduced. For a DCN, the SDH provides the following bandwidth:
l
By using the D1D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH), the SDH provides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN. By using the D4D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH), the SDH provides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN. By using the D1D12 bytes in SDH section overheads, the SDH provides a 768 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
Figure 6-2 shows the positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads. Figure 6-2 Positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads
A1 B1 D1 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 AU PTR B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 MSOH A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 * * RSOH
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides multiple DCN solutions. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the DCN networking by using the following protocols:
l l l
HWECC TCP/IP (IP over DCC) OSI (OSI over DCC)
The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN networking of OptiX equipment. The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and application. As it is a private protocol, HWECC protocol does not meet the management requirements for hybrid networking by using the equipment from other vendors.
6 DCN Features
The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the management issue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. These two protocols can also be used in a network that consists of only Huawei equipment.
NOTE
When OptiX equipment is interconnected with other vendors' equipment that does not support the TCP/IP and OSI standard communication protocols, Huawei provides the transparent transmission function for DCC bytes, and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit the OAM information.
6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports different DCC resource allocation modes. Table 6-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500 DCC Allocation Channel type Operation mode Mode 1 Mode 2 N1GSCC N3GSCC/N4GSCC
Supports the D1D3 and D4D12 channel types. Supports 40 D1D3 channels. Supports 10 D1D3 channels. Supports 10 D4D12 channels. Mode 3 Supports 22 D1D3 channels. Supports 6 D4D12 channels. Mode 4 Supports 28 D1D3 channels. Supports 4 D4D12 channels. Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Supports 160 D1D3 channels. Supports 40 D1D3 channels. Supports 40 D4D12 channels. Supports 26 D1D3 channels. Supports 26 D4D12 channels. Supports 12 D1D3 channels. Supports 12 D4D12 channels. Supports 8 D1D3 channels. Supports 10 D1D3 channels. Supports 70 D1D3 channels. Supports 30 D4D12 channels. Mode 8 Supports 100 D1D3 channels. Supports 20 D4D12 channels.
Protocol type Default mode
Supports HWECC, IP and OSI protocols. Mode 1
6.2 HWECC
The equipment supports the HWECC protocol, which is a private protocol defined by Huawei. 6.2.1 Features The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment. 6.2.2 Application
6 DCN Features
The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
6.2.1 Features
The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment. In hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors, the HWECC protocol is not able to identify the OAM information from other vendors' equipment, but can transparently transmit such OAM information. By using the existing DCC resources, the user is able to meet the requirements of a centralized management of equipment. The HWECC protocol has the following features:
l l
The protocol provides a flexible networking environment. NEs can be connected through optical interfaces or Ethernet interfaces for embedded control channel (ECC) communication. The protocol provides transparent transmission for the OAM information from other vendors' equipment.
NOTE
In the OptiX OSN 3500, each slot supports a maximum of eight ECC channels.
6.2.2 Application
The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
OAM Information Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment Only

When OAM information is transmitted only among the OptiX OSN equipment, a gateway NE is required for the communication with the T2000. The T2000 is connected to the gateway NE through the Qx interface and tests, manages and maintains the entire network. The T2000 system helps improve the network service quality, lower the maintenance cost, and ensure a reasonable use of network resources. A non-gateway NE is connected to the gateway NE through ECC, to realize the transmission of the OAM information. In some cases, extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces is also available among NEs. See Figure 6-3. Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC
PC
HUB1
GNE1
NE6 NE6
HUB2
NE7
NE12
NE2
NE5
NE8
NE11
NE3 Network cable Fiber
NE4
NE9
NE10
Subnet1
Subnet2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
6-5
6 DCN Features
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment

When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4D12 bytes of the OptiX OSN equipment. See Figure 6-4. Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)
D4-D12
D1-D3 Third party equipment
Transparent transmission
D1-D3 Third party equipment
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4-D12 bytes of the equipment. See Figure 6-5. Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)
Third party equipment
D4-D12
Transparent transmission
D1-D3
D1-D3
6.3 IP Over DCC

The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol. 6.3.1 Features The OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information by using the IP over DCC protocol.
6 DCN Features
6.3.2 Application The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
6.3.1 Features
The OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information by using the IP over DCC protocol. The IP over DCC protocol has the following features:
l
The TCP/IP protocol realizes the compatibility with the equipment from other vendors. In this case, the network management is simplified. The Layer 3 functions of protocol stacks are adopted. In this case, additional overheads or server trails are not required for the transmission of the OAM information of other vendors' equipment. The protocol provides flexible networking modes. Several application layer protocols are supported.
l l
6.3.2 Application
The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-6. Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (IP)
IP over DCC

When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-7.
6 DCN Features
Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (IP)
IP over DCC Third party equipment Third party equipment
6.4 OSI Over DCC

The equipment supports the OSI over DCC protocol. 6.4.1 Features The OSI over DCC protocol is used for hybrid networking between the OptiX OSN equipment and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC. 6.4.2 Application The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
6.4.1 Features
The OSI over DCC protocol is used for hybrid networking between the OptiX OSN equipment and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC. The OSI over DCC protocol has the following features:
l
In a transmission network that consists of equipment from different vendors, the OSI over DCC protocol enables the transparent transmission of OAM information at the network layer, and thus provides a more flexible networking. The user does not need to set up additional DCN channels. The existing DCC resources realize the centralized management of equipment from different vendors.
6.4.2 Application
The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third-party equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol.
6 DCN Features
As shown in Figure 6-8, Huawei equipment is located at the network edges, and the equipment from other vendors is located in the backbone network. The OAM information between the T2000 and the OptiX OSN equipment needs to be forwarded by the equipment from other vendors. In this case, each subnet that consists of the Huawei equipment must have a minimum of one gateway NE. Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (OSI)
OSI protocol stack
Third party equipment OSI protocol stack
OSI over DCC
OSI protocol stack

When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol. As shown in Figure 6-9, the Huawei equipment is located in the backbone network, and the equipment from other vendors is located at the network edges. The OAM information between the network management system and the equipment of other vendors needs to be forwarded by the Huawei equipment.
NOTE
In actual application, a network cannot always be divided in this manner. A more common hybrid networking is that the equipment from different vendors coexists at the core layer and the peripheral layer.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
6-9
6 DCN Features
Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (OSI)
Third party equipment OSI protocol stack OSI protocol stack OSI o ver DCC
Third party equipment Third party equipment
OSI protocol stack
6-10
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
7
About This Chapter
ASON Features
The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series support the ASON features. 7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links and TE links. 7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient. 7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network security. 7.4 ASON Clock Tracing ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode. In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode. In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet. 7.5 SLA The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients. 7.6 Diamond Services Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation. 7.7 Gold Services Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization. 7.8 Silver Services The service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement. 7.9 Copper Services
7 ASON Features
The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services. 7.10 Iron Services The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources. 7.11 Tunnels Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON server trails. 7.12 Service Association The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points into the ASON network. 7.13 Service Optimization After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the service optimization. 7.14 Service Migration OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt the services. 7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes. You can revert all service to the original routes. 7.16 Preset Restoring Trail Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing. 7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared mesh restoration trail. 7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible. 7.19 Shared Risk Link Group In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable. 7.20 ASON Trail Group The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS. 7.21 Protocol Encryption You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network. 7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane To increase the network maintainability, the ASON network supports the reporting alarms of the control plane.
7-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies

The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links and TE links. 7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol. 7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol. When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control links to the entire network. See Figure 7-1. As a result, each NE obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets. Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management system for real-time display. See Figure 7-2.
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-2 Management of control topology
R1
R4
R2 R3
: ASON NE : User equipment
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol. After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide resource topology. ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to T2000, which performs a real-time refresh. As shown in Figure 7-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed on the NM in real time.
7-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery
R1
R4
R2 R3
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration

The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient. The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing. Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services. For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in Figure 7-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route. The service is created as follows:
l l l l l
Choose the bandwidth granularity. Choose the server level. Choose the source node. Choose the sink node. Create the service.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7-5
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration
R1
D A B C
E I F
R4
H G
R2
R3
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration

The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network security. As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network security. As shown in Figure 7-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
7-6
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-5 Trail restoration
R1
D A B C
E I F
R4
H G
R2 R3
7.4 ASON Clock Tracing

ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode. In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode. In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet. In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source. The clock is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is avoided. In addition, the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with many ASON NEs, several ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20 ASON NEs are on the clock tracing link in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet generates its own clock tracing relation to trace the primary source in the local subnet. In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary source and link does not affect the clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, one ASON clock subnet is created in one ASON domain.
Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing

The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
l
Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be created to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock. Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the auto-tracing and auto-switching features. The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.
Clock Protection Protocol

To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must start the standard SSM protocol.
7 ASON Features
Primary Reference Clock Source

Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock tracing relation. At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or internal clock source of edge NEs should be manually set as the primary reference clock source for the ASON clock subnet. The following clock sources can be set as the primary clock reference source.
l l l
Line clock source External clock source Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The ASON clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock sources. The other clock sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected primary reference clock source fails, the entire subnet automatically traces another backup primary reference clock source. In this way, a new clock tracing tree is established. A priority should be set for the primary reference clock source. As shown in Figure 7-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock sources are configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON clock subnet automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous. When the primary BITS fails, each ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the secondary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous. Figure 7-6 ASON clock subnet
BITS Primary base clock source A B BITS Standby base clock source
:ASON NE : BITS
Interfacing Mode
By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according to the network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an available clock source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical interfaces to the clock quality not detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this way, these optical interfaces are excluded from the options of the clock tracing sources for ASON NEs.
7 ASON Features
Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is configured with such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and the quality of the out-link clock is increased. During the computation for creating the clock tracing tree, the clock signals strengthened by the regeneration source are selected with priority. For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used. An NE receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration device. The regenerated clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input interface. The clock then works as the system tracing clock for the NE. In this way, clock signals are strengthened and the line clock signals output from the NE are also strengthened.
Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet

The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
l
The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest clock quality. If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON clock subnet traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority. If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority, the ASON clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to generate multiple clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is avoided. If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet traces the internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the entire network are synchronized.
Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet. If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure only the quality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet. If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only modify the subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the ASON clock subnet.
Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet

If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM disabled mode, you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source. If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard SSM mode, you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source. If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended SSM mode, you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode. Then you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source.
7 ASON Features
7.5 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients. The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection, as listed in Table 7-1. Table 7-1 Service level Service Diamond service Gold service Silver service Copper service Iron service Protection and Restoration Scheme Protection and restoration Implementation Means SNCP and rerouting Switching and Rerouting Time Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s Protection and restoration MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s Restoration No protection No restoration Preemptable MSP Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s -
Table 7-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services. Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services Service Level Working Resource of TE Link Not used Not used Protection Resource of TE Link Not used Used when the resource is not enough Not used Not used Used when the resource is not enough Non-Protection Resource of TE Link Used Used with the priority
Diam ond servic e
Service creation Service rerouting Service optimization
Not used Used with the priority Used with the priority
Used Used when the resource is not enough Used when the resource is not enough
Gold servic e
Service creation Service rerouting
7-10
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
Service Level
Working Resource of TE Link Used with the priority Not used Not used
Protection Resource of TE Link Not used Not used Used when the resource is not enough Not used Not used Not used Used with the priority
Non-Protection Resource of TE Link Used when the resource is not enough Used Used with the priority
Service optimization Silver servic e Service creation Service rerouting Service optimization Copp er servic e Iron servic e Service creation Service optimization Service creation
Not used Not used Not used Not used
Used Used Used Used when the resource is not enough
7.6 Diamond Services

Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation. A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives the service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP. Figure 7-7 shows a diamond service.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7-11
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-7 Diamond Services

Working LSP
R1
D
R4
I F
A B
C H
R2
R3
Protection LSP :ASON NE :User equipment
There are three types of diamond services.

l l l
Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails. Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail. Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 7-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service. Table 7-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service. Table 7-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service. Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
l
If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP. If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service survivability. Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority. Supports three rerouting policies:

Rerouting
l l l
Use existing trails whenever possible Do not use existing trails whenever possible Best route
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7-12
7 ASON Features
Attribute Revertive
Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service

l
Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically. Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually. Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services. Supports migration between diamond services and silver services. Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service migration
Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting
Supports manual switching. Supports service optimization. Does not support service association. Does not support diamond ASON server trails. R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
l
When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered. When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered. When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services. Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority. Supports three rerouting policies:

Rerouting
l l l
Revertive
Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically. Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually.
7-13
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
Attribute Service migration
Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service

l
Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services. Supports migration between diamond services and silver services. Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting
Supports manual switching. Supports service optimization. Does not support service association. Does not support diamond ASON server trails R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
l
When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered. When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered. When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not triggered. Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services. Supports migration between diamond services and silver services. Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service migration
l l
Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail
Supports manual switching. Supports service optimization. Does not support service association. Does not support diamond ASON server trails.
7-14
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
7.7 Gold Services

Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization. A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or nonprotection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service. As shown in Figure 7-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I. Figure 7-8 Gold services
R1
D A
R4
E F C
MSP
I
MSP
B
MSP
G
R2
R3
:ASON NE :User equipment
Table 7-6 lists the attributes of gold services. Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services Attribute Requirements for creation Multiplex section protection Gold Service Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
l
Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services. Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services. Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7-15
7 ASON Features
Attribute Protection and restoration
Gold Service When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performed to protect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is then triggered to restore services.
l l l
Rerouting
Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority. Supports three rerouting policies:

Revertive
Preset restoring trail Service migration
Supports setting the preset restoring trail.

l
Supports migration between permanent connections and gold services. Supports migration between gold services and silver services. Supports migration between gold services and copper services.
l l
Service switching Service optimization ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting
Supports manual switching. Supports service optimization. Supports gold ASON server trails. R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
7.8 Silver Services

The service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement. Silver services are also called rerouting services. Upon an LSP failure, periodical rerouting is performed until the rerouting succeeds. If there are not enough resources, service may be interrupted. As shown in Figure 7-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Hence, services are protected.
7-16
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-9 A silver service
R1
D A B C
E LSP after rerouting I F
R4
R2
Original LSP
R3
Table 7-7 lists the attributes of silver services. Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Rerouting Silver Services Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
l l l
Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority. Supports three rerouting policies:

Revertive
Preset restoring trail Shared mesh restoration trail
Supports setting the preset restoring trail. Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for revertive silver trials.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7-17
7 ASON Features
Attribute Service migration
Silver Services
l
Supports migration between permanent connections and silver services. Supports migration between diamond services and silver services. Supports migration between gold services and silver services. Supports migration between silver services and copper services. Supports service optimization. If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be optimized before reverting to its original route.
l l
Service optimization
l l
Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting
Supports service association. Supports silver ASON server trails. R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
7.9 Copper Services

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services. Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute and are interrupted. Table 7-8 lists the attributes of copper services. Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Service migration Silver Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. Does not support rerouting.
l
Supports migration between permanent connections and copper services. Supports migration between diamond services and copper services. Supports migration between gold services and copper services. Supports migration between silver services and copper services.
l l l
Service optimization Service association ASON server trail
Supports service optimization. Supports service association. Supports ASON server trails.
7-18
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
7.10 Iron Services

The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources. An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection resources or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs. When an LSP fails, services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered.
l
When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS switching occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted. After the MS is recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption, preemption and restoration of the iron service are all reported to the T2000. When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network resources are insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted silver service or diamond service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 7-9 lists the attributes of iron service. Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services Attribute Requirements for creation Multiplex section protection Iron Service Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. To create iron services, the following resources can be used:
l l l
Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service restoration Service migration Service optimization
Does not support rerouting. Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent connections. Supports service optimization.
7.11 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON server trails. When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level for the tunnel can be gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. See Figure 7-10.
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-10 Tunnel
VC4 tunnel
VC12 service
R1
R4
R3
R2
: ASON NE ASON domain : User equipment
The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. As shown in Figure 7-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards. After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the new ports.
NOTE
In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.
Figure 7-11 Lower cross-connection
VC12 NE1 Crossconnection VC12 Tributary unit
ASON server trail VC4 NE2
VC12
Line unit
Table 7-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.

7 ASON Features
Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Rerouting Gold Tunnel Same as gold services Same as gold services
l
Silver Tunnel Same as silver services Same as silver services

l
Copper Tunnel Same as copper services Does not support rerouting Does not support rerouting
Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority.
Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority.
Revertive Preconfiguration of restoring route Service association Service migration
Not supported Not supported
Not supported Supported
Not supported Not supported
Not supported
l l l l
Supported
Supported
Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections. Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels. Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels. Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Service optimization Tunnel level
Supports service optimization.. VC-4
7.12 Service Association

The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points into the ASON network. Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from two points. As shown in Figure 7-12, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7-21
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-12 Service association
R1
11 protection
E D A B C H G F
R4
11 protection
R2
R3
Table 7-11 lists the attributes of service association. Table 7-11 Attributes of service association Attribute Service optimization Rerouting Service type Service Association Supports optimization of associated services. When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.
l l l l l l
Supports the association of two silver services. Supports association of two copper services. Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service. Supports the association of two silver tunnels. Supports the association of two copper tunnels. Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.
7.13 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the service optimization. LSP optimization has the following features.
l l l
Only manual optimization is supported. The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service. During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed.
7-22

l
7 ASON Features
During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations, optimization is not allowed. The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper and tunnel services.
7.14 Service Migration

OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt the services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l l l l l l
Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections Migration between gold services and permanent connections Migration between silver services and permanent connections Migration between copper services and permanent connections Migration between iron services and permanent connections Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
Service Migration between ASON Trails

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l l l l l l l l
Migration between diamond services and silver services Migration between diamond services and copper services Migration between silver services and copper services Migration between gold services and silver services Migration between gold services and copper services Migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels Migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels Migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels
7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes

After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes. You can revert all service to the original routes.
CAUTION
The operation reverting network-wide services to original routes interrupts the services. Be cautious to perform the operation.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7-23
7 ASON Features
Original Route
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted to the original route manually or automatically. In addition, the current route can be set to the original route after rerouting of the ASON services. ASON services are classified into revertive services and non-revertive services. If the original route recovers after rerouting, the revertive services can be manually or automatically reverted to the original route. If the original route recovers after rerouting, the non-revertive services can be only manually reverted to the original route. Before the non-revertive services revert to the original route, the resources of the original route may be used by other services.
Revertive Services
The ASON services supporting the service reverting are as follows:
l l l l
Diamond services Gold services Silver services Tunnels
Description on Service Reverting

For the detailed description of reverting, refer to the Table 7-12. Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes Attribution Prerequisites Reverting mode Batch reverting Timeslots Non-Revertive Service The original route has no failures and has free timeslots. Manually reverting. Supported. Only if the original timeslots in the original route are spare and is "Reverting to original timeslots" set, the service can revert to the original timeslots. Supported. Revertive Service The original route has no failures. Manually reverting or automatically reverting. Not supported. Services reverting to original routes. Services reverting to original timeslots.
Modifying original route Reversion lock
Supported. Supported.
7-24
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
7.16 Preset Restoring Trail

Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing. The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail.
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared mesh restoration trail. When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service uses the resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used for service restoration. If only partial resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used with priority for computation of a restoration trail. The other resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the trail. As shown in Figure 7-13, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver services share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh restoration trail, for the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. Figure 7-13 Shared mesh restoration trail
Revertive silver service 1 A B C
Share MESH restoration trail 1 G Share MESH restoration trail 2 H
D Revertive silver service 2
Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
7 ASON Features
l l l l l
Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh restoration trail. A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at different levels. For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive attribute cannot be changed. The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected resources of TE links. For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set the preset restoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following differences.
l
For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no resources are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration trail may be used by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset restoration trail cannot be used. For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The reserved resources cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can be restored with the best effort. In addition, to increase the resource utilization, the shared mesh restoration trails for different services can share some resources.
7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic

The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible. The ASON calculates a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many services between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route. The traffic equilibrium function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 7-14, there are many silver services between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe and reliable, the ASON allocates them to different routes averagely as possible such as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I. Figure 7-14 Traffic equilibrium
R1
D A B C
E I F
R4
H G
R2
R3
7-26
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7 ASON Features
7.19 Shared Risk Link Group

In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable. The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk. Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.
7.20 ASON Trail Group

The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 7-15, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary. Figure 7-15 LCAS (different path)
Path 1
VCTRUNK1 Router A
NE1 NE2
Router B
Path 2
If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. As shown in Figure 7-16, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected. Figure 7-16 LCAS (same path)
VCTRUNK1
NE1
NE2
Router A
Router B
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
7-27
7 ASON Features
ASON Trail Group

An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible. Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.
7.21 Protocol Encryption

You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network. An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network, counterfeit a node of this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets transmitted by nodes in the network and repeat the attack. To prevent these network insecurities, the ASON provides the function to encrypt protocols. In an ASON domain, the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are encrypted for authentication. The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication for interconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces). The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5 authentication. The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent nodes are the same.
7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane

To increase the network maintainability, the ASON network supports the reporting alarms of the control plane. Alarms on the control plane include node alarms, link alarms and service alarms. Node alarms indicate whether the node ID and authentication code are correct, and whether the node ID and authentication code are associated with neighbors. Link alarms indicate the link availability, and whether the configuration of link timeslot and MS is correct. Service alarms indicate whether the services are interrupted, whether the service level is downgraded, and whether the service trail is changed.
7-28
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8 Protection
8
About This Chapter
Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports equipment level protection and network level protection. 8.1 Equipment Level Protection The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1 protection for power supplies. 8.2 Network Level Protection The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8-1
8 Protection
8.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1 protection for power supplies. 8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types. 8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner. 8.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. 8.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes. 8.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board level 1+1 protection. 8.1.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. 8.1.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX. 8.1.8 Intelligent Fans The intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the ambient temperature of the equipment. 8.1.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. 8.1.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards

The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types. Table 8-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 8-2 lists the TPS protection parameters. Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards Service Type E1/T1 Protection Scheme Main subrack: one 1:N protection(N 8) Extended subrack: one 1:N protection (N 8)
Supported Boards N1PQM, N1PQ1, N2PQ1a
8 Protection
Service Type E3/T3/E4/STM-1
Protection Scheme Main subrack: two 1:N (N 3) protections Extended subrack: two 1:N (N 3) protections
Supported Boards N1PD3, N1PL3, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4, N1SEP
Ethernet DDN
Two 1:1 protections One 1:N protection (N 8)
N2EFS0, N4EFS0 N1DX1
a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.
Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters Parameter Priority Switching type Switching condition Description 1X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is the highest priority. Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l l l l
The clock of the working board is lost. The working board is offline. The working board is cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Switching time Revertive mode WTR time
50 ms Revertive 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in a safe manner. For the OptiX OSN 3500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 8-3 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8-3
8 Protection
Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Slot 9 is for the working board and slot 10 is for the protection board. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l l l l
The working board is offline. The working board is cold reset. The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is triggered. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode
Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.
8.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit

With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. For the OptiX OSN 3500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication (SCC) functions. The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the active GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state. Table 8-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit. Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Sot 18 is for the working board and slot 17 is for the protection board. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l l l
The working board is offline. The working board is under a cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode
Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.
8-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8 Protection
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards

The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
l
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection. The N1EAS2 board only supports the DLAG protection.
Table 8-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards. Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition BPS, PPS DLAG
Configurable according to the requirement.
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:

l
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:

l
The port status of the working board is Link Down. The clock of the working board is lost. The hardware of the working board fails. The working board is off line. A switching command is issued.
The port status of the working board is Link Down. The clock of the working board is lost. The hardware of the working board fails. The working board is off line.
l l
Switching time
350 ms
In full duplex mode: 3 s In auto-negotiation mode: 500 ms
When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS protection switching, the following conditions must be met.
l
The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working mode as the protection group. The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends. The working mode should not be modified before the protection group is deleted. Otherwise, the protection group becomes abnormal.
CAUTION
The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the protection group.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8-5
8 Protection
8.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards

The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board level 1+1 protection. Table 8-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards. Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Configurable as required. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l l l l l
A manual switching command is issued. The working board is offline. The working board is under a cold reset. The power supply of the working board fails. The clock of the working board fails. The hardware of the working board fails.
Revertive mode Switching time
Non-revertive 50 ms
8.1.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit

The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. The OptiX OSN 3500 can access two 48 V DC power supplies by using two N1PIU or N1PIUA boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal operation of the equipment.
8.1.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit

The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX. In the OptiX OSN 3500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving. A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection. Table 8-7 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.
8-6
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8 Protection
Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Configurable as required. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l
The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Switching time
Non-revertive 50 ms
8.1.8 Intelligent Fans

The intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the ambient temperature of the equipment. The OptiX OSN 3500 uses three intelligent fan units to realize the heat dissipation. The power supplies of the three fan modules provide a mutual backup for each other. The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection. When one of the fan modules becomes faulty, the other operates at its full speed. The running status of the fan is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the fan unit.
8.1.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the N1AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
8.1.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions

The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading

The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply

The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
8 Protection
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software can re-initialize the chip. The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can affect services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to unstable voltages, the value can be restored to normal. When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Board Temperature Detection

Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.
8.2 Network Level Protection

The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection. 8.2.1 Linear MSP The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dualended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings. 8.2.2 MSP Ring The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring. 8.2.3 SNCP The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. 8.2.4 DNI The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology. 8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly. 8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. 8.2.7 RPR Protection The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering. 8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
8.2.1 Linear MSP

The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dualended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings. The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1+1 and 1:N (N14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 40 linear MSPs. In the 1:N protection
8 Protection
scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841. For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning Guidelines. Table 8-8 lists the linear MSP parameters. Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters Protection Type 1+1 singleended switching 1+1 singleended switching 1+1 dualended switching 1+1 dualended switching 1:N dualended switching Revertive Mode Nonrevertive Revertive Switching Protocol Not required Not required APS protocol APS protocol APS protocol Switching Time 50 ms Default WTR Time Switching Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS
l l l
50 ms
600s
Nonrevertive Revertive
50 ms
R_LOF MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD (optional) Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching
50 ms
600s
l l
Revertive
50 ms
600s
l l
8.2.2 MSP Ring

The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841. Table 8-9 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning Guidelines. Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Protection Scheme STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Maximum Number of MSP Rings Supported 2

8-9
8 Protection
Protection Scheme STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring
Maximum Number of MSP Rings Supported 4 11 12
Table 8-10 lists the MSP ring parameters. Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters Protection Type Two-fiber bidirectional MSP Revertive Mode Revertive Switching Mode
l
Switching Time 50 ms
Default WTR Time 600s
Switching Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS
l l l l l
Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching Forced switching ring Manual switching ring Exercise switching ring Forced switching span Manual switching span Exercise switching span
Two-fiber unidirectional MSP
Revertive
50 ms
600s
R_LOF MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD (Optional) Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching
Four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Revertive
50 ms
600s
l l
8-10
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8 Protection
The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 has the following features.
Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain. In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to eight VC-4s. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s.
Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.
Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section

For STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 3500 is able to process two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical interface.
MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level. In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs. To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 3500 node sets up a detailed list of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that may be misconnected.
8.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), the subnetwork connection multipath protection (SNCMP), and the subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP), for subnetworks that meet the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
SNCP
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 8-1.
8 Protection
Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail
The unprotected trail
NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5
NE6 NE7 NE8
Convert to an unprotected trail The working trail
Convert to an SNCP-protected trail
NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5
NE6 NE7 NE8
The protction trail

If the IXCS is used, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 2016 SNCP protection pairs. If any other cross-connect board is used, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports a maximum of 1184 SNCP protection pairs. In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported:
l l l l l l
Manual switching to protection path Manual switching to working path Forced switching to protection path Forced switching to working path Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting Revertive mode setting
Table 8-11 lists the SNCP parameters.
8-12
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8 Protection
Table 8-11 SNCP parameters Protection Type SNCP Revertive Mode Revertive Non-revertive Switching Time 50 ms 50 ms Default WTR Time 600s Switching Conditions Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS
l l l l l l l l l l l l l
R_LOF AU_LOP TU_LOP MS_AIS AU_AIS TU_AIS HP_UNEQ (Optional) HP_TIM (Optional) B2_EXC B3_EXC (Optional) B3_SD (Optional) BIP_EXC BIP_SD
SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path) protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protection scheme. The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP. Figure 8-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path. Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection
A Working Source Protection 1 Protection 2 Protection 3 Intermediate subnetworks Sink B
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8-13
8 Protection
In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 8-3, two protection paths protect a working path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path. Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking
NE 3 NE 4
NE 2 NE 1 Working Microware Radio
Protection 1
Protection 2
Microware Radio
When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 8-4, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.
8-14
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8 Protection
Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 3 NE 4
Protection 1
Protection 2
Microware Radio
When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become faulty, as shown in Figure 8-5, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2. Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 3 NE 4
Protection 1
Protection 2
Microware Radio
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8-15
8 Protection
SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path. The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path. When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not occur.
8.2.4 DNI
The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T G.842. The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure. The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
l l l
Two SNCP rings An SNCP ring and an MSP ring Two MSP rings
Figure 8-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.
8-16
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8 Protection
Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings

NE A
SNCP Ring 1 NE C NE D
NE E SNCP Ring 2
NE F
Selecting Point Forward Working Routing Reverse Working Routing
NE G
When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.
l l l l l l l
A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1. A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2. A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings. NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty. NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty. NE C and NE E are faulty. NE D and NE F are faulty.
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is faulty, interring services are not affected.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8-17
8 Protection
8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection

When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly. Figure 8-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection. Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-64
STM-16 SNCP
STM-64
STM-16 MSP
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP

In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to process multiple sets of independent K bytes. N1SL64, N1SLD64, N2SL64, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 and N1SF16 of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An STM-64 or STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes. Figure 8-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.
8-18
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8 Protection
Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4/16
STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring STM-16/64
STM-4/16
STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring STM-4/16 STM-4/16
For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown in Figure 8-9. Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
MSP ring 1 STM-16 STM-64 MSP ring 2 STM-16
The OptiX OSN 3500 also supports the line units of the same rate to form a shared protection in two directions, as shown in Figure 8-10. In this case, the west STM-16 line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group. Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate
MSP ring 1 STM-16 STM-16 MSP ring 2 STM-16
8.2.7 RPR Protection

The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering. Figure 8-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on the
8 Protection
inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among nodes. This is because a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet. Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring
Node 3
Node 5
RPR
Node 2
Node 1
In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets. The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 8-12.
8-20
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
8 Protection
Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection

Node 4 Outer ring
Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5
Node 2
Node 1 Wapping
The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber cut. See Figure 8-13. Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection
Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5
Node 1 Node 2 Steering
In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is decreased.
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection

The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring. Figure 8-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The VPRing/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths.
8 Protection
Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

NE2
Working path ATM service NE1 Protection path NE3 ATM service
NE4
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up at the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.
8-22
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
9 Clock
9
About This Chapter
Clock
The equipment can trace several clock sources. It also provides the clock protection function. 9.1 Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace different types of clock sources, which are as follows: 9.2 Clock Working Mode The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.781. The modes are as follows: 9.3 Clock Outputs The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs. 9.4 Clock Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provide the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM and extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching. 9.5 Tributary Retiming The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals from a digital synchronization network, and then to transmit the signals to the receiver.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
9-1
9 Clock
9.1 Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace different types of clock sources, which are as follows:
l l l l
External clock source Line clock source Tributary clock source Internal clock source
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports priority setting for clock sources. By default, the internal clock source is of the lowest priority. 9.1.1 External Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 support two external clock source inputs. 9.1.2 Line Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the line clock source. 9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace tributary clock sources. 9.1.4 Internal Clock Source When all the line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable, or when only the internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the internal clock source as the system clock.
9.1.1 External Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 3500 support two external clock source inputs.
l l
Two 75-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
9.1.2 Line Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the line clock source.
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace tributary clock sources. The specific tracing relation is as follows.
l
When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the ninth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PQ1, PQM. When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the fourth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PD3, PQ3. When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PL3, DX1.
9-2

l
9 Clock
When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to any physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the SPQ4.
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source

When all the line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable, or when only the internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the internal clock source as the system clock.
9.2 Clock Working Mode

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.781. The modes are as follows:
l l l
Locked mode Holdover mode Free-run mode
9.2.1 Locked Mode In the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 traces one clock source from the line clock source, tributary clock source and the external clock source. 9.2.2 Holdover Mode If all the clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the frequency information stored before the clock source is lost. The frequency information complies with the related phase standard defined in ITU-T G.813. 9.2.3 Free-Run Mode The OptiX OSN 3500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whose frequency stability is not lower than 4.6 ppm.
9.2.1 Locked Mode

In the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 traces one clock source from the line clock source, tributary clock source and the external clock source.
9.2.2 Holdover Mode

If all the clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the frequency information stored before the clock source is lost. The frequency information complies with the related phase standard defined in ITU-T G.813.
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode

The OptiX OSN 3500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whose frequency stability is not lower than 4.6 ppm.
9.3 Clock Outputs

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following clock outputs:
9 Clock
l l l
Line clock outputs Tributary clock outputs External clock outputs

NOTE
For tributary clock outputs, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the tributary retiming function, which helps improve the quality of the output tributary clock.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock outputs:

l l
Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
NOTE
For external clock outputs, only two 75-ohm or two 120-ohm clocks can be used, but both the clocks cannot be applied.
9.4 Clock Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 provide the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM and extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching. The OptiX OSN 3500 provide the synchronization status message (SSM) function for synchronous clocks. Either the standard SSM or the extended SSM can be configured to realize the protection switching of clocks. 9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled In the case of the OptiX OSN 3500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. In this case, the clock sources are selected or switched according to the priority list. The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source. 9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 3500 to choose the clock source of the highest quality to prevent the generation of clock tracing ring. 9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled The standard SSM cannot prevent the clock lock ring in all cases. In this case, Huawei provides the concept of the clock source ID.
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled

In the case of the OptiX OSN 3500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. In this case, the clock sources are selected or switched according to the priority list. The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source. The priority list can be manually configured. Figure 9-1 shows the clock configuration and the priority list when the SSM is not enabled.
9-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
9 Clock
Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled

BITS Node 1 Priority 1: BITS Priority 2: Internal Slot 11 Slot 8 Node 4 Priority 1: Slot 8 Priority 2: Slot 11 Priority 3: Internal
Slot 8 Node 2 Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 3: Internal Slot 11
Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 8
Slot 11
Clock tracing
Node 3 Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 3: Internal
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled

The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 3500 to choose the clock source of the highest quality to prevent the generation of clock tracing ring. Figure 9-2 shows the application of the standard SSM. Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM
BITS Node 1 Fiber break Slot 11 Node 2 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 8 Node 4
Node 3 Clock tracing

Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Node, Node 2 automatically select the clock source of the highest quality.
9-5
9 Clock
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled

The standard SSM cannot prevent the clock lock ring in all cases. In this case, Huawei provides the concept of the clock source ID. The extended SSM uses the first four bits of the S1 byte as the clock source ID and the latter four bits to indicate the quality of the clock source. The first four bits of the S1 byte is used to specify the unique ID of a clock source. These four bits are transmitted along with the SSM. When receiving the S1 byte, a node checks if the clock source ID is transmitted by itself. If the clock source ID is transmitted by itself, the node considers the clock source as unavailable. In this way, this avoids the occurrence of the clock lock ring. Figure 9-3 shows the clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled. Figure 9-4 shows the application of the clock source ID when the extended SSM is enabled. Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled
BITS Node 1 BITS failure Node 1 BITS
Node 2
Node 4 Node 2 Clock mutual tracing Node 3 caused by BITS failure Node 3 Node 4
Clock tracing
9-6
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
9 Clock
Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID
BITS failure
BITS
Node 1 Node 2 Node 4
Node 3 Node 1 finds that the ID sent from Node 4 is 1, which is originated from itself. Node 1 will not trace it to avoid the clock mutual tracing. Clock tracing
A clock source ID can be manually set. In the case of the configuration of clock protection for an SDH ring network, the clock ID is always manually set, to effectively avoid the occurrence of clock lock ring. The clock ID occurs only at key nodes rather than all the nodes in an SDH network. To set the clock source ID, do as follows:
l l l
Allocate a clock ID for every external BITS. Allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every node that has an external BITS. In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every junction node. In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for the line clock source (if any line source is involved at a junction node) in the direction that the signal travels at every junction node.
9.5 Tributary Retiming

The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals from a digital synchronization network, and then to transmit the signals to the receiver. 9.5.1 Retiming Principle With the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmit reference timing signals. 9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function PDH signals can pass through an SDH network with or without retiming.
9 Clock
9.5.1 Retiming Principle

With the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmit reference timing signals. Figure 9-5 shows the retiming principle. Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram
SDH clock source SEC Extract clock ( f1 ) Extract clock ( f0 )
PLL
f1 Input tributary signal
Desynchronization
Retiming buffer
f0 Input tributary signal
The retiming function is performed in the following process:

l l
The phase-lock loop (PLL) is used to extract clock f1 from the received tributary signals. The desynchronization function is used to recover the tributary signal data in an error-free manner, and then to store the data in the retiming buffer. The SDH equipment clock (SEC) f0, which is synchronous with the digital synchronization network, is extracted and then added into the tributary signal data.
In this way, the output tributary signals carry a good timing reference, which serves the synchronous service equipment.
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function

PDH signals can pass through an SDH network with or without retiming.
PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network Without Retiming

Figure 9-6 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network without retiming. On the synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid a periodical slip. When PDH signals are adapted into the SDH transmission network, pointer justifications cause phase jumps of output PDH signals, and thus frequency f1 of the output PDH signals becomes asynchronous with f0. As a result, the frequency of output signals cannot be used as a timing reference for equipment k, such as a digital stored program control (SPC) switch.
9-8
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
9 Clock
Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming

SDH transmission network
PRC f1 f0 f0
Synchronous service equipment i
f1
S S S S SDH MUX SDH MUX
D D D D
f1
Synchronous service equipment k
f 1:
PDH signal frequency
The tributary signal frequency cannot be used as a synchronization clock for equipment k.
f 0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC S : Synchronization D : Desynchronization R : Retiming PRC: SDH primary reference clock
PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network with Retiming

Figure 9-7 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network with retiming. On the synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid a periodical slip. At the network output end, the retiming function provides a local timing reference f0, and thus jitters and wanders caused by pointer justifications are absorbed. Frequency f1 of the output PDH signals is still synchronous with f0, so equipment k can extract tributary timing signals for the synchronization purpose. Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming
Transmission network
PRC f1 f0 f0
Synchronous service equipment i f1: PDH signal frequency
f1
S S S S f0 SEC SDH MUX SDH MUX
D D D D R f0
Synchronous service equipment k
f0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC S: Synchronization D: Desynchronization R: Retiming PRC: SDH primary reference clock SEC: SDH equipment clock
The tributary signal frequency can be used as a synchronization clock for equipment k.
The transmission network in Figure 9-7 can be a single SDH network, or a combination of several SDH and PDH networks.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
9-9
10 OAM
10
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides maintenance and management functions.
OAM
10.1 Operation and Maintenance The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 system are designed according to the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 3500 system provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers. 10.2 Network Management The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH, Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
10-1
10 OAM
10.1 Operation and Maintenance

The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 system are designed according to the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 3500 system provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.
Alarm and Performance Management

l
In the case of any emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual alarms to prompt the network administrators to take proper measures. The AUX board provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, four output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation interfaces to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment. Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators to locate and handle faults quickly. Alarm storms can be suppressed. If the number of reported alarms exceeds 1000, the NE reports that the excessive alarms are generated. Then it does not report excessive alarms. The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically monitored. After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant alarms. The working temperature of some boards can be queried. When the MSP or TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service administrator focuses on the service state only.
l l
ALS Function
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
l
When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is generated at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at the 60-second interval and lasts for 2s every time. After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beams launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches the laser beams. As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.
Optical Power Management

l
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH and Ethernet optical interfaces. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH optical module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate and wavelength.
10-2

l
10 OAM
The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose singlemode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement. This facilitates the maintenance. The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
Multiple Maintenance Methods

l
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other. The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms of each NE in a network. The in-service upgrade of the board software and the in-service loading of NE software are supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 3500 system. The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, line boards and cross-connect boards support the PRBS test and the remote bit error test. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually interrupt the collection according to the requirement. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the board version replacement function. This helps to replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are the same as the configuration and service status of the old version board. Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically detect faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults. The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and controlled. After a board is inserted, it does not work if the total power consumption of the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the equipment. The port status can be queried.
10.2 Network Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH, Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP), which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
10-3
11 Security Management
11
About This Chapter
Security Management
The T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE. 11.1 Authentication Management Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication. 11.2 Authorization Management Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system. 11.3 Network Security Management Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000 to effectively manage the NEs. 11.4 System Security Management Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed forcibly. 11.5 Log Management The OptiX OSN 3500 provides log management functions.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
11-1
11.1 Authentication Management

Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
l
NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a valid user name and a valid password. NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time. For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE simultaneously, they need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique. Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to the NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at lower level exit from the NE. NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE. NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to prevent other users from operating the locked modules. Query the online NE users.
11.2 Authorization Management

Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
l
NE user management:
According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels, which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level in an ascending order. According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users, CMD NE users, and general NE users. Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag. Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority, or change the user flag. Delete NE users. According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided into administrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnel group, and maintenance personnel group. Modify the group of a user.
NE user group management:
11.3 Network Security Management

Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000 to effectively manage the NEs.
l
The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol. Therefore, the data is complete and safe.
11-2

l
Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the network, and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the ACL rule is divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.
For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule only to check the source address of the IP packets only. For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL rule. In this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, and protocol type of the received IP packets. If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the advanced ACL rule to check the packets. Query the ACL rule. Modify the ACL rule. Delete the ACL rule. Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to access it over the Ethernet network. Access through the serial interface. Access through the OAM port. Access through the COM port. Owing to the security, after an NE is initialized or downloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM access function can be enabled when necessary.
An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods:
Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the T2000-LCT needs to be used to manage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the T2000. When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user name and password) is encrypted.
11.4 System Security Management

Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed forcibly.
l l
Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE. Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report an alarm after a user logs in to the NE. Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password. Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts. Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts. Query or set the password uniqueness.
l l l l
11.5 Log Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides log management functions. 11.5.1 NE Security Log Management The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
11.5.2 Syslog Management The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
11.5.1 NE Security Log Management

The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
l l
Query the security logs of the NE. Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
11.5.2 Syslog Management

The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports:
l l l l
Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP Adding and deletion of Syslog servers Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers at the same time Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog server and the NE
Figure 11-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available in a network. Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and the system log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through several methods, for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode. Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting
NE B
NMS
NE A (client) ECC/ IP OVER DCC TCP/IP real time security log
NE C (client)
Syslog Server B
Syslog Server A
NE D
11-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)

NOTE
Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of all NEs in a network. A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system log server. In Figure 11-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, configure the IP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required. When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not directly connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs of the NE must be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the Syslog servers through ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example, configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE for NE D. For detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Optical Transmission System Configuration Guide.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
11-5
12 Technical Specifications
12
About This Chapter
Technical Specifications
The technical specifications provide the specifications of the optical interfaces, electrical interfaces and environment. 12.1 Interface Types The OptiX OSN 3500 supports optical interfaces of different types. 12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and ATM optical interfaces. This section lists the specifications of these optical interfaces. 12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliary interfaces. 12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with related ITU-T Recommendations. 12.5 Transmission Performance The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T standards. 12.6 Timeslot Numbering The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12. 12.7 Cabinet and Subrack Specification The technical specifications of the subrack and cabinet provide the dimensions and weight. 12.8 Power Supply Specification The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the input of 48 V or 60 V DC power supply. 12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. 12.10 Safety Certification The OptiX OSN 3500 has received several safety certifications.
12.11 Environmental Specification The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for normal operation. 12.12 Environment Requirement The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a different environment for storage, transportation and operation. This section lists the environment requirements.
12-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12.1 Interface Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports optical interfaces of different types. Table 12-1 lists the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Interface Type SDH optical interface Ethernet interface ATM interface PDH/SDH electrical interface DDN electrical interface Clock interface Rate and Feature 155520kbit/s, 622080kbit/s, 2488320kbit/s, 2666057 kbit/s, 9953280kbit/s, 10.71Gbit/s 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10GBase-LR, 10GBase-LW 34368 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s, 622080 kbit/s 1544 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s, 34368 kbit/s, 44736 kbit/s, 139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1 Two 75-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Alarm interface Auxiliary interface Sixteen alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, alarm concatenated interfaces, four cabinet alarm indicator interfaces Administration interface, orderwire interface, data interface
12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and ATM optical interfaces. This section lists the specifications of these optical interfaces. 12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types. 12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types. 12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces. 12.2.4 Laser Safety Class The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M.
12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types.
Table 12-2 lists the specifications for the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Fiber Type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 155 520 kbit/s I-1 0 to 2 1260 to 1360 Ie-1 0 to 2 1260 to 1360 S-1.1 2 to 20 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 20 to 60 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 60 to 80 1480 to 1580 Ve-1.2 80 to 100 1480 to 1580
Single-mode LC 15 to 8 23 8 8.2 19 to 14 31 14 10 15 to 8 28 8 8.2 5 to 0 34 10 10 5 to 0 34 10 10 3 to 0 34 10 10
Table 12-3 lists the specifications for the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Fiber Type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 622 080 kbit/s I-4 0 to 2 1261 to 1360 S-4.1 2 to 20 1274 to 1356 L-4.1 20 to 50 1280 to 1335 L-4.2 50 to 80 1480 to 1580 Ve-4.2 80 to 100 1480 to 1580
Single-mode LC 15 to 8 23 8 8.2 15 to 8 28 8 8.2 3 to 2 28 8 10 3 to 2 28 8 10 3 to 2 34 13 10.5
12-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Table 12-4 lists the specifications for the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Fiber Type Mean launched power (dBm) Specification 2 488 320 kbit/s I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2 (Je) 80 to 105 1530 to 1560 V-16.2 (Je) (BA) 105 to 145 1530 to 1565 U-16.2 (Je) (BA +PA) 145 to 200 1550.12
0 to 2 1266 to 1360
2 to 25 1260 to 1360
25 to 50 1280 to 1335
50 to 80 1500 to 1580
Single-mode LC 10 to 3 5 to 0 2 to 3 2 to 3 5 to 7 Without BA: 2 to 3 With BA: 13 to 15 Without BA and PA: 2 to 3 With BA: 15 to 18 Without BA and PA: 28 With PA: 32 3 0 9 9 9 9 Without BA and PA: 9 With PA: 10
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
18
18
27
28
28
28
Minimum overload (dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/nm)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
12
1200 to 1600
2000
2800
3400
Table 12-5 lists the specifications for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 12-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Code contenta Operating wavelength (nm) Fiber Type Mean launched power (dBm) Specification 2 666 057 kbit/s Ue-16.2c SF16+BA (14dB)+PA 1550.12 Single-mode LC Without BA and PA: 5 to 1 With BA: 13 to 15 Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Without BA and PA: 27.5 With PA: 37 Minimum overload point (dBm) b Minimum extinction ratio (dB) c 10 10 Without BA and PA: 5 to 1 With BA: 13 to 15 Without BA and PA: 27.5 With PA: 37 10 10 Without BA, RA and PA: 5 to 1 With BA: 15 to 18 Without BA, RA and PA: 27.5 With PA: 42 10 10 Ue-16.2d SF16+BA (17dB)+PA 1550.12 Ue-16.2f SF16+BA(17dB)+RA +PA 1550.12
a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14) indicates that the optical power of the signal after it is amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC +BA+PA" indicates that the optical interface specifications include FEC, BA and PA. b: The parameter is that of the PA. c: Parameters in the table are of the optical modules, excluding the amplifiers.
Table 12-6 lists the specifications for the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-6 Specifications of the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Transmission distance (km) Specification 9 953 280 kbit/s I-64.1 I-64.2 S-64.2 b 2 to 35 L-64.2b (BA) 35 to 80 Le-64. 2 35 to 55 Ls-64.2 V-64.2b (BA +PA +DCU) 80 to 152
0 to 2
0 to 25
55 to 75
12-6
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Item Operating wavelength (nm) Fiber Type Mean launched power (dBm)
Specification 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 1550.12
Single-mode LC 6 to 1 5 to 1 1 to 2 Without BA: 4 to 2 With BA: 13 to 15 2 to 4 4 to 7 Without BA, PA and DCU: 4 to 1 With BA: 13 to 15 21 21 Without BA, PA and DCU: 14 With PA: 26 1 1 1 1 8 8 1
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
11
14
14
14
Minimum overload point (dBm)
Minimum 6 extinction ratio (dB) Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/nm) 6.6
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
500
800
1600
1200
1600
2040 (with DCU)
Table 12-7 lists the specifications for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-7 Specifications of the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Code content a Operating wavelength (nm) Specification 10 709 225 kbit/s Ue-64.2c FEC+BA(14dB) +PA+DCU(60+80)c 1550.12nm Ue-64.2d FEC+BA(17dB)+PA +DCU(80 x 2) 1550.12nm Ue-64.2e FEC+BA(17dB)+RA +PA+DCU(60 x 3) 1550.12nm
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12-7
Item Fiber Type Mean launched power (dBm)b Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)b Minimum overload point (dBm)b Minimum extinction ratio (dB)b Dispersion capacity (ps/nm)b
Specification Single-mode LC 4 to 1 14 1 10 4 to 1 14 1 10 4 to 1 14 1 10
800
800
800
a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14) indicates that the optical power of the signal after it is amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC +BA+PA+DCU" indicates that the optical interface specifications include FEC, BA, PA and DCU. b: The parameters in the table are only for the optical module, and not for the amplifier and the DCU. c: The parameter indicates different distances corresponding to different dispersion compensation values.
The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 can output wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDM system. Table 12-8 lists the wavelengths and frequencies of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces. Table 12-8 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Frequency (THz) 192.1 192.2 192.3 192.4 192.5 192.6 192.7 Wavelength (nm) 1560.61 1559.79 1558.98 1558.17 1557.36 1556.56 1555.75 No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Frequency (THz) 194.1 194.2 194.3 194.4 194.5 194.6 194.7 Wavelength (nm) 1544.53 1543.73 1542.94 1542.14 1541.35 1540.56 1539.77
12-8
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
No. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Frequency (THz) 192.8 192.9 193.0 193.1 193.2 193.3 193.4 193.5 193.6 193.7 193.8 193.9 194.0
Wavelength (nm) 1554.94 1554.13 1553.33 1552.52 1551.72 1550.92 1550.12 1549.32 1548.51 1547.72 1546.92 1546.12 1545.32
No. 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Frequency (THz) 194.8 194.9 195.0 195.1 195.2 195.3 195.4 195.5 195.6 195.7 195.8 195.9 196.0
Wavelength (nm) 1538.98 1538.19 1537.40 1536.61 1535.82 1535.04 1534.25 1533.47 1532.68 1531.90 1531.12 1530.33 1529.55
Table 12-9 lists the specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-9 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload point (dBm) Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/nm) Specification 2 488 320 kbit/s 170 2 to 3 28 640 5 to 1 28 2 666 057 kbit/s 640 5 to 1 28 9 953 280 kbit/s 40 4 to 1 14 10 709 225 kbit/s 40 4 to 1 14
3400
12800
12800
800
800
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12-9
Item Minimum extinction ratio (dB) OSNR (dB)
Specification 8.2 10 10 10 10
Without FEC: 21
With FEC: 16 Without FEC: 21
Without FEC: 26
With FEC: 20 Without FEC: 26
12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types. The specification of the Ethernet optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment comply with IEEE 802.3 standards. Table 12-10 lists the specifications. Table 12-10 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces Interface Type Fiber Type Transmitti ng Optical Power (dBm) 2 to 5 Central Wavelen gth (nm) Minimu m Overload Point (dBm) 3 Receiver Minimum Sensitivit y (dBm) 23 Minimu m Extinctio n Ratio (dB) 9
1000BaseZX (80 km) 1000BaseZX (40 km) 1000BaseLX (10 km) 1000BaseSX (0.5 km) 100BaseFX (15 km) 100BaseFX (2 km) 10GBASE -LR (LAN)
12-10
Single -mode LC Single -mode LC Single -mode LC Multimode LC Single -mode LC Single -mode LC Single -mode LC
1500 to 1580 1275 to 1350 1270 to 1355 770 to 860
4.5 to 0
23
9 to 3
19
9.5 to 0
17
15 to 8
1261 to 1360 1270 to 1380 1260 to 1355
28
10
19 to 14
14
30
10
-6 to -1
0.5
-12.6
3.5
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Interface Type
Fiber Type
Transmitti ng Optical Power (dBm) -6 to -1
Central Wavelen gth (nm)
Minimu m Overload Point (dBm) 0.5
Receiver Minimum Sensitivit y (dBm) -12.6
Minimu m Extinctio n Ratio (dB) 3.5
10GBASE -LW (WAN)
Single -mode LC
1260 to 1355
12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface

The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces. Table 12-11 and Table 12-12 list the specifications of the ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-11 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Fiber Type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 155520 kbit/s Ie-1 0 to 2 1260 to 1360 S-1.1 2 to 20 1261 to 1360 L-1.1 20 to 60 1263 to 1360 L-1.2 60 to 80 1480 to 1580 Ve-1.2 80 to 100 1480 to 1580
Single-mode LC 19 to 14 31 14 10 15 to 8 28 8 8.2 5 to 0 34 10 10 5 to 0 34 10 10 3 to 0 34 10 10
Table 12-12 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Specification 622080 kbit/s S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2

12-11
Item Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Fiber Type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Specification 2 to 20 1274 to 1356 Single-mode LC -15 to -8 28 8 8.2 -3 to 2 28 8 10 -3 to 2 28 8 10 -3 to 2 34 13 10.5 20 to 50 1280 to 1335 50 to 80 1480 to 1580 80 to 100 1480 to 1580
12.2.4 Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M. Table 12-13 lists the safety classes of lasers used for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-13 Laser safety class Laser Safety Class CLASS 1 Board N1SL64, N2SL64, N1SF64, N1SLD64, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16, N1SF16, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SLT1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1, N1SLH1, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N2EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N1EAS2, N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EFF8 BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A, N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
CLASS 1M
12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliary interfaces. 12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types. 12.3.2 DDN Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN interfaces. 12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.
12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types. Table 12-14 lists the specifications of the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-14 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces Interface Type Code Signal bit rate at the output interface Attenuation tolerance at the input interface Frequency deviation tolerance at the input interface Anti-interference capability of input interface 1544 kbit/s B8ZS, AMI 2048 kbit/s HDB3 34368 kbit/s HDB3 44736 kbit/s B3ZS 139264 kbit/s CMI 155520 kbit/s CMI
ITU-T G.703compliant
ITU-T G.703-compliant
12.3.2 DDN Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN interfaces. Table 12-15 lists the DDN interface types. Table 12-15 DDN interface types Interface Type Framed E1 interface type Description Framed E1 signal Standard Physical and electrical features comply with ITU-T G.703. The frame structure complies with ITU-T G. 704.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12-13
Interface Type N x 64 kbit/s interface
Description V.35 interface V.24 interface X.21 interface RS-449 interface RS-530 interface RS-530A interface
Standard Complies with ITU-T V.35. Complies with ITU-T V.24. Complies with ITU-T X.21. Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A, RS-422A). Complies with EIA RS-530. Complies with EIA RS-530A.
12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.
64 kbit/s Interface
Table 12-16 lists the specifications of the 64 kbit/s electrical interface, which is the F1 interface on the AUX board. Table 12-16 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface Item Bit rate Timing signal Coding style Outgoing pulse shape Output interface characteristic Incoming interface characteristic Specification 64 kbit/s From RX ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.703
RS-232 Interfaces
Table 12-17 lists the specifications of the RS-232 electrical interfaces. The RS-232 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the AUX. Table 12-17 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces Item Bit rate Mode
12-14
Specification 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum RS-232 Tx & Rx data only

Item Electrical level
Specification 5 V to 15 V
RS-422 Interfaces
Table 12-18 lists the specifications of the RS-422 electrical interfaces. The RS-422 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the AUX. Table 12-18 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces Item Bit rate Mode Electrical level Specification 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum RS-422 Tx & Rx data only 2.0 V
Orderwire Phone Interface

Table 12-19 lists the specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces. Table 12-19 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface Item Speech channel interface Impedance Bandwidth Operating current Input gain Output gain Signaling Analog EOW extension Impedance Bandwidth Tx level Rx level 600 ohms 300 Hz to 3400 Hz 3.51 dBr 3.51 dBr 600 ohms 300 Hz to 3400 Hz 18 mA 4/0/0 dB 0/7/0 dB DTMF compliant with ITU-T Q.23 Specification
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12-15
12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with related ITU-T Recommendations. 12.4.1 Clock Interface Type The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces. 12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T G. 813.
12.4.1 Clock Interface Type

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces. Table 12-20 lists the clock features of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-20 Clock features Clock Type External synchronization source Synchronization output Feature Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs
12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance

The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T G. 813. Table 12-21 lists the timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment. Table 12-21 Timing and synchronization performance Output Jitter G.813 compliant Output Frequency of Internal Oscillator in the Free-Run Mode G.813 compliant Long-Term Phase Variation in the Locked Mode G.813 compliant
12.5 Transmission Performance

The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T standards. Table 12-22 lists the performance of the output jitter and bit error in an SDH/PDH network.
Table 12-22 Transmission performance Jitter at STM-N Interface G.813/G.825 compliant Jitter at PDH Interface G.823/G.783 compliant Bit Error G.826 compliant
12.6 Timeslot Numbering

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12. Table 12-23 and Table 12-24 list the details. Table 12-23 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I) TUG2 (7-1) TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 (3-3) 1 2 2 4 3 2 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 4 5 TUG2 (7-2) 4 2 5 4 6 5 2 6 4 7 6 2 7 4 8 TUG2 (7-3) 7 2 8 4 9 8 2 9 5 0 9 3 0 5 1 TUG (7-4) 1 0 3 1 5 2 1 1 3 2 5 3 1 2 3 3 5 4 TUG (7-5) 1 3 3 4 5 5 1 4 3 5 5 6 1 5 3 6 5 7 TUG (7-6) 1 6 3 7 5 8 1 7 3 8 5 9 1 8 3 9 6 0 TUG (7-7) 1 9 4 0 6 1 2 0 4 1 6 2 2 1 4 2 6 3
Table 12-24 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II) TUG2 (7-1) TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 (3-3) 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 5 TUG2 (7-2) 4 5 6 2 5 2 6 2 7 4 6 4 7 4 8 TUG2 (7-3) 7 8 9 2 8 2 9 3 0 4 9 5 0 5 1 TUG2 (7-4) 1 0 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 5 2 5 3 5 4 TUG2 (7-5) 1 3 1 4 1 5 3 4 3 5 3 6 5 5 5 6 5 7 TUG2 (7-6) 1 6 1 7 1 8 3 7 3 8 3 9 5 8 5 9 6 0 TUG2 (7-7) 1 9 2 0 2 1 4 0 4 1 4 2 6 1 6 2 6 3
12.7 Cabinet and Subrack Specification

The technical specifications of the subrack and cabinet provide the dimensions and weight. Table 12-25 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12-17
Table 12-25 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets Dimensions (mm) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) Weight (kg) 55 79 60 84 70 94 Allowed Subrack Quantity 1 1 2 2 2 2
NOTE All dimensions are in mm. The following figure shows the dimensions of the width, the depth and the height.
H W D
Table 12-26 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Table 12-26 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack Dimensions (mm) 497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H) Weight (kg) 23 (net weight of the subrack without any board or fan)
12.8 Power Supply Specification

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the input of 48 V or 60 V DC power supply. Table 12-27 lists the specifications of the power supply. Table 12-27 Power supply specifications Item Power supply mode Nominal voltage Voltage range Maximum power consumption
12-18
Specification DC power supply 48 V or 60 V 38.4 V to 57.6 V or 48 V to 72 V 600 W/1200 Wa
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Item Maximum current
Specification 20 A/28.4 Ab
a: This value indicates the maximum power consumption for the enhanced subrack. b: This value indicates the maximum current for the enhanced subrack.
12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. Table 12-28 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications. Table 12-28 EMC test results Item Radiated emission Standard CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A Conducted emission for DC port CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A Conducted emission for signal ports CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Field Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz2700 MHz: 10 V/m) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-2 (Air Discharge:8 kV; Contact Discharge:6 kV) Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for DC ports Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for signal ports Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-4(1 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-4(1 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-5(Line to Line: 1 kV, Line to Ground: 2 kV) Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-5(1 kV) Immunity to continuous conducted interference for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)
12-19
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Item Immunity to continuous conducted interference for signal ports Immunity To Continuous Voltage dips and Short Interruption and Voltage Variation for DC Power Port
Standard ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-6(10 V) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3 IEC 61000-4-29
12.10 Safety Certification

The OptiX OSN 3500 has received several safety certifications. Table 12-29 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received. Table 12-29 Safety certifications Item Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Standard CISPR22 Class A CISPR24 EN55022 Class A EN50024 ETSI EN 300 386 Class A ETSI ES 201 468 CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Class A AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A GB9254 Class A VCCI Class A Safety IEC 60950-1 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950-1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943
12-20
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Item Laser safety
Standard FDA rules 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1 IEC60825-2 EN60825-1 EN60825-2 GB7247
Health
ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.1
Environment protection
RoHS
12.11 Environmental Specification

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper environment for normal operation. The OptiX OSN 3500 can operate normally for a long term in the environment defined in Table 12-30. Table 12-30 Environment specifications for long-term operation Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature Relative humidity Anti-seismic performance Range 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 0 to 45 10% to 90% ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
12.12 Environment Requirement

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a different environment for storage, transportation and operation. This section lists the environment requirements. The following international standards are taken as the reference for specifying the environment requirements.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12-21
l
ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperaturecontrolled location NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection
12.12.1 Environment for Storage The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper climate for storage. 12.12.2 Environment for Transportation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper climate for transportation. 12.12.3 Environment for Operation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper climate for operation.
12.12.1 Environment for Storage

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper climate for storage.
Climate
Table 12-31 lists the climate requirements for storage. Table 12-31 Climate requirements for storage Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature Temperature change rate Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Air flowing speed Range 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 40 to +70 1 /min 5% to 100% 1120 W/s2 600 W/s2 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
The requirement for storing the equipment on the customer site is that generally, the equipment must be stored indoors. There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment carton. The equipment should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water leakage, such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities. If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that following conditions are met.
l
The carton must be intact.

12-22

l l l
Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton. There should be no water on the ground where the carton is placed. The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.
Biological Environment
l l
Avoid the growth of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete. Take anti-rodent measures.
Air Cleanness
l
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 12-32.
Table 12-32 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage Mechanical Active Substance Suspending dust Precipitable dust Gravel Content 5.00 mg/m3 20.0 mg/m2h 300 mg/m3
The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 12-33.
Table 12-33 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage Chemical Active Substance SO2 H 2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content 0.30 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12-23
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-34 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage. Table 12-34 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage Item Random vibration Sub-Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency range dB/oct Range 5 Hz to 20 Hz +12 0.02 m2/s3 20 Hz to 50 Hz 50 Hz to 100 Hz -12
12.12.2 Environment for Transportation

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper climate for transportation.
Climate
Table 12-35 lists the climate requirements for transportation. Table 12-35 Climate requirements for transportation Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature Temperature change rate Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Air flowing speed Range 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 40 to +70 1/min 5% to 100% 1120 W/s2 600 W/s2 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
l l l
The carton must be intact. Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton. There should be no water in the transportation tool.
12-24
l l
Air Cleanness
l
Table 12-36 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation Mechanical Active Substance Suspending dust Precipitable dust Gravel Content No requirement 3.0 mg/m2h 100 mg/m3
Table 12-37 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation Chemical Active Substance SO2 H 2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content 1.00 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 3.00 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 0.03 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-38 lists the requirements for transporting the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12-25
Table 12-38 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation Item Random vibration Sub-Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency range Impact Impact response spectrum I (sample weight > 50 kg) Impact response spectrum II (sample weight 50 kg) Fall-off Weight (kg) 10 15 20 30 40 50 100 100 Range 1 m2/s3 5 Hz to 20 Hz 3 dBA 20 Hz to 200 Hz
100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on each surface
180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on each surface
Height (m) 1.0 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.1
NOTE Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment that is spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
12.12.3 Environment for Operation

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires a proper climate for operation.
Climate
Table 12-39 and Table 12-40 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 12-39 Requirements for temperature and humidity Temperature Long-term operation
12-26
Relative Humidity Short-term operation Long-term operation Short-term operation
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Temperature 0 to 45 5 to 55
Relative Humidity 10% to 90% 5% to 95%
NOTE The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.
Table 12-40 Other climatic requirements Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature change rate Solar radiation Heat radiation Air flowing speed Range 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 30/h 700 W/s2 600 W/s2 5 m/s
l l
Air Cleanness
l
Table 12-41 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance Mechanical Active Substance Dust particle Suspending dust Precipitable dust Gravel Content 3 x 105 particles/m3 0.2 mg/m3 1.5 mg/m2h 20 mg/m3
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
12-27
l
Table 12-42 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation Chemical Active Substance SO2 H 2S NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 NOX Content 0.30 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-43 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation. Table 12-43 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation Item Sinusoidal vibration Sub-Item Velocity Acceleration Frequency range Impact Impact response spectrum II Static load Range 5 mm/s 5 Hz to 62 Hz 2 m/s2 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times on each surface 0 kPa
NOTE Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by an equipment that is spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
12-28
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
A Power Consumption and Weight of Boards
Power Consumption and Weight of Boards

Different boards have different power consumption and weight. Table A-1 lists the power consumption and weight of the boards. Table A-1 Power consumption and weight of the boards Board Power Consumption (W) Weight (kg) Board Power Consumption (W) Weight (kg)
SDH Processing Boards N1SL64 30 1.1 N1SL16A , N2SL16A N3SL16A N1SL16, N2SL16 N3SL16 N1SLQ16 N1SF16 N2SL4 N1SLD4 N1SLD4 A N2SLQ4 N1SL1 N1SL1A N2SLQ1 20 1.1
N2SL64 N1SLD64 N1SF64 N1SLD16 N2SLQ16 N1SL4 N1SL4A N2SLD4 N1SLQ4 N1SLQ4A N2SL1 N1SLQ1
32 41 30 23 35 15 17 15 16 17 14 15
1.1 1.2 1.1 0.9 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
17 20 22 20 26 15 15 17 16 14 17 15
0.9 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
A-1
Board
Power Consumption (W) 17 22 17
Weight (kg) 1.0 1.0 1.0
Board
Power Consumption (W) 26 15 -
Weight (kg) 1.1 1.2 -
N1SLQ1A N1SLH1 N1SEP1
N2SLO1 N1SLT1 -
PDH Processing Boards N1PQM N2PQ3 N1PL3 N2PL3 N1PL3A N2PL3A N1DX1 22 13 15 12 15 12 15 (before the TPS switching); 31 (after the TPS switching) 1.0 0.9 1.0 0.9 1.0 0.9 1.0 N1PD3 N2PD3 N1PQ1 N2PQ1 N1SPQ4 N2SPQ4 N1DXA 19 12 19 13 24 24 10 1.1 0.9 1.0 1.0 0.9 0.9 0.8
Interface Boards and Protection Switching Boards N1MU04 2 0.4 N1C34S 0 (before the TPS switching); 2 (after the TPS switching) 3 0 (before the TPS switching); 5 (after the TPS switching) 0 (before the TPS switching); 6 (after the TPS switching) 0 (before the TPS switching); 9 (after the TPS switching) 0 (before the TPS switching); 2 (after the TPS switching) 0 (before the TPS switching); 3 (after the TPS switching) 0.3
N1EU08 N1OU08, N2OU08 N1EU04
11 6
0.4 0.4
N1TSB4 N1TSB8
0.3 0.3
0.4
N1D75S
0.4
N1D12B
0.3
N1D12S
0.4
N1DM12
0 (before the TPS switching); 8 (after the TPS switching) 6
0.5
N1D34S
0.4
N1EFF8
0.4
N1ETS8
0.4
Data Processing Boards
A-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Board
Power Consumption (W) 70 43 70 29 65 (without an interface board); 75 (with an interface board) 50 40 41 41 41
Weight (kg) 1.2 1.0 1.1 0.9 1.1
Board
Power Consumption (W) 35 35 35 30 30
Weight (kg) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
N1EAS2 N2EGS2 N1EGS4, N3EGS4 N1EGT2 N1EMS4
N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0 N1EFS4 N2EFS4
N2EMR0 N2EGR2 N1ADL4 N1ADQ1 N1IDQ1
1.2 1.1 0.9 1.0 1.0
N1EFT8 N1EFT8A N1ETF8 N1IDL4 N1MST4
26 26 2 41 26
1.0 1.0 0.4 1.0 0.9
Cross-connect and System Control Boards N1SXCSA N1SXCSB N1GXCSA N1EXCSA N1UXCSA/ B 63 63 27 62 65 1.9 1.9 1.8 2.0 2.0 N1IXCSA /B N1XCE N1GSCC N3GSCC N4GSCC 94 25 10 20 19 2.1 1.5 0.9 0.9 1.0
Other Boards N1LWX N1FIB N1MR2A N1MR2C TN11MR2 TN11CMR 2 TN11CMR 4 30 0 0 0 0.2 0.2 0.2 1.1 0.4 1.0 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.9 N1BA2 N1BPA N2BPA DCU N1AUX N1FAN N1PIU, N1PIUA 20 20 11 0 19 16 x 3 8 1.0 1.0 1.2 0.4 1.0 1.5 x 3 1.2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
A-3
Board
Power Consumption (W) 0.2
Weight (kg) 0.9
Board
Power Consumption (W) 16
Weight (kg) 1.3
TN11MR4
TN11OB U1
A-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
B Compliant Standards
B
B.1 ITU-T Recommendations B.2 IEEE Standards B.3 IETF Standards B.4 ANSI Standards B.5 Environment Related Standards B.6 EMC Standards B.7 Safety Compliance Standards B.8 Protection Standards B.9 ASON Standards
Compliant Standards
This chapter lists the standards that OptiX OSN 3500 complies with.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
B-1
B.1 ITU-T Recommendations

Table B-1 ITU-T recommendations Recommendation G.652 G.655 G.661 G.662 G.663 G.671 G.691 G.692 G.694.1 G.694.2 G.702 G.703 G.704 G.7041 G.7042 G.707 G.709 G.773 G.774 1-5 G.775 Description Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and cable Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber amplifiers Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and subsystems Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH systems with optical amplifiers Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44736kbit/s hierarchical levels Generic framing procedure (GFP) Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN) Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and clearance criteria
B-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Recommendation G.783 G.784 G.803 G.811 G.812 G.813 G.823 G.824 G.825 G.826 G.831 G.841 G.842 G.957 G.958 I.121 I.150 I.311 I.321 I.361 I.630 M.3010 Q.811 Q.812
Description Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy. The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy. The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate. Management capabilities of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables Broadband aspects of ISDN B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics B-ISDN general network aspects B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions B-ISDN ATM layer specification ATM protection switching Principles for a telecommunication management network Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
B-3
Recommendation V.24 V.35 V.28 X.21
Description List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz group band circuits Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems Ethernet over LAPS
X.86
B.2 IEEE Standards

Table B-2 IEEE standards Standard IEEE 802.17 IEEE 802.1ad IEEE 802.1ag IEEE 802.1d IEEE 802.1q IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.3ad IEEE 802.3ae IEEE 802.3ah IEEE 802.3u Description Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications Virtual bridged local area networks Amendment 4: Provider bridges Connectivity fault management Media access control (MAC) bridges Virtual bridged local area networks Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification Aggregation of multiple link segments Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, and management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100BaseT Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for 802.3 full duplex operation Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
IEEE 802.3x IEEE 802.3z
B-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
B.3 IETF Standards

Table B-3 IETF standards Standard RFC 2615 (1999) RFC 1662 (1994) RFC 1661 (1994) RFC 1990 RFC 2514 RFC 3031 RFC 3032 Description PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH PPP in HDLC-like Framing The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP) Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECTIDENTITIES for ATM management Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture MPLS Label Stack Encoding
B.4 ANSI Standards

Table B-4 ANSI related standards Standard ANSI X3.296 ANSI X3.230 Description SBCON (ESCON): FICON Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
B.5 Environment Related Standards

Table B-5 Environment related standards Standard IEC 600682 IEC 60068-3-3 IEC 60721-2-6 IEC 60721-3-1 Description Basic environmental testing procedures Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information - Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1: Storage
B-5
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Standard IEC 60721-3-3
Description Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations Partly temperature-controlled location Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements: Physical protection
ETS 300 019-1-1 ETS 300 019-1-3 NEBS GR-63-CORE
B.6 EMC Standards

Table B-6 EMC related standards Standard IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-29 EN 61000-4-29 CISPR 22/EN 55022 CISPR 24/EN 55024 ETSI EN 300386 Description Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing and measurement techniques-Surge immunity test Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing and measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement Information technology equipment-immunity charateristicsLimits and methods of measurement Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
B-6
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Standard ETSI EN 201468
Description Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific applications Power supply interface at the input totelecommunications equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc).
ETSI EN 300132-2
B.7 Safety Compliance Standards

Table B-7 Safety compliance related standards Standard EN 60950 IEC 950 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 950-95 73/23/EEC UL 60950-1 IEC 60529 Description Information technology equipment - safety Safety of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment Audio, video and similar electronic equipment Safety of information technology equipment Low voltage directive Safety of information technology equipment Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
B.8 Protection Standards

Table B-8 Protection related standards Standard IEC 61024-1 IEC 61312-1 IEC 61000-4-5 ITU-T K.11 ITU-T K.20 Description Protection of structures against lightning Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general principles Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to overvoltage and overcurrents
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd B-7
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Standard ITU-T K.27 ITU-T K.41
Description Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication building Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centres to surge overvoltage
B.9 ASON Standards

Table B-9 ASON related standards Standard G.807 G.8080 G.7712 G.7713 G.7714 G.7715 G.7716 G.7717 G.7718 RFC 3471 (GMPLS) Description Requirements for automatic switched transport networks (ASTN) Architecture for the automatically switched optical network (ASON) Architecture and specification of data communication network Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on PNNI Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state protocols Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and recovery Connection admission control Framework for ASON management Signaling functional description
B-8
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C Basic Principle
Basic Principle
The basic principle includes the SDH basic principle, Ethernet basic principle, and ATM basic principle. C.1 Introduction to SDH This section describes the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) levels, multiplexing structures, frame structures, and overhead bytes. C.2 Introduction to ATM This section describes the ATM cell structure and provides an overview of the ATM technology. C.3 Introduction to Ethernet This section describes the Ethernet basic principle and frame structure. C.4 Link Aggregation This section describes the basic principle of link aggregation and the relevant frame structure. C.5 Introduction to MPLS This section describes the MPLS basic principle and frame structure. C.6 QinQ Principle This section describes the QinQ basic principle and frame structure.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C-1
C Basic Principle
C.1 Introduction to SDH

This section describes the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) levels, multiplexing structures, frame structures, and overhead bytes. C.1.1 SDH Levels The first level bit rate of SDH is 155520 kbit/s. Signals of higher levels can be generated by interleaving N signals of the base SDH level (N=4, 16, 64). C.1.2 Multiplexing Structure The multiplexing structure of the equipment complies with the requirements specified in the ITU-T Recommendations. C.1.3 Basic Frame Structure The SDH basic frame structure consists of the RSOH, MSOH, POH, AU pointer, and payload. C.1.4 SOH Description The SOH bytes include STM-1 SOH bytes, STM-4 SOH bytes, STM-16 SOH bytes, and STM-64 SOH bytes. C.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description The POH bytes include the higher order POH bytes and lower order POH bytes.
C.1.1 SDH Levels

The first level bit rate of SDH is 155520 kbit/s. Signals of higher levels can be generated by interleaving N signals of the base SDH level (N=4, 16, 64). See Table C-1. Table C-1 SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates SDH level STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 STM-64 STM-64 (out-of-band FEC) Bit rate (kbit/s) 155520 622080 2488320 9953280 10664228
C.1.2 Multiplexing Structure

The multiplexing structure of the equipment complies with the requirements specified in the ITU-T Recommendations. The multiplexing structure of OptiX OSN products series is shown in Figure C-1.
C-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C Basic Principle
Figure C-1 Multiplexing structure

STM-64 64 STM-16 16 STM-4 4 STM-1 AUG-1 AU-4 VC-4 3 3 Pointer justification Multiplexing Aligning Mapping 4 AU-3 VC-3 TUG-3 7 TUG-2 3 TU-12 TU-11 VC-12 C-12 1 C-4 4 16 AU-4-4c VC-4-4c C4-4c 4 AU-4-16c VC-4-16c C4-16c AU-4-64c VC-4-64c C4-64c
TU-3
VC-3 C-3
VC-11
C-11
C.1.3 Basic Frame Structure

The SDH basic frame structure consists of the RSOH, MSOH, POH, AU pointer, and payload. Figure C-2 shows the STM-N frame structure. Figure C-2 STM-N frame structure
270 X N columns (bytes) 9 X N columns (bytes) 261 X N columns (bytes) Transmission direction
1 2 3 4 5 6 Multiplex section overhead 7 M SOH 8 9 Administrative unit pointer (s) AU-PTR Regenerator section overhead RSOH
High-order path overhead POH
ST M -
N payload
9 rows
P a y l oa d
Frame n-1
Frame n 9 X 270 X N bytes
Frame n+1
Information code stream
Frame cycle: 125 sm Scrambler: X7 + X 6 +1 T=125 s m
C.1.4 SOH Description

The SOH bytes include STM-1 SOH bytes, STM-4 SOH bytes, STM-16 SOH bytes, and STM-64 SOH bytes.
STM-1 SOH
Figure C-3 shows the structure of STM-1 SOH.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C-3
C Basic Principle
Figure C-3 STM-1 SOH

9 columns * A1 B1 D1 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 AU-PTR 9 rows A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 Serial Serial 1 2 RSOH *
B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 X *
B2 Serial 4
B2
K1 D5 D8 D11 M1
K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 Serial 3 MSOH
Bytes reserved for national use Unscrambled bytes Media dependent bytes
Note: All unmarked bytes are reserved for future international standardization (for media dependent,additional national use and other purpose).
STM-4 SOH
Figure C-4 shows the structure of STM-4 SOH. Figure C-4 STM-4 SOH
36 columns * * * Z0 Z0 Z0 * * * * * * * * RSOH A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 B1 D1 9 rows B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 D4 D7 D10 S1 x * D5 D8 D11 M1 Bytes reserved for national use Unscrambled bytes E1 D2 AU-PTR K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 F1 D3
MSOH
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization (for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).
C-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C Basic Principle
STM-16 SOH
144 columns A1 B1 D1 9 rows B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 AU-PTR K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 * Z0 * * * *
Bytes reserved for national use M1 Unscrambled bytes * Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization (for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose). x
STM-64 SOH
576 columns A1 B1 D1 9 rows B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 AU-PTR K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 * Z0 * * * *
Bytes reserved for national use M1 Unscrambled bytes * Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization (for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose). x
SOH Bytes Description

Table C-2 SOH bytes description Byte A1, A2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
Description Framing byte (A1 = F6H, A2 = 28H)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd C-5
C Basic Principle
Byte B1 B2 D1, D2 and D3 D4D12 E1 E2 F1 H1, H2 H3 J0 K1, K2 (b1b5) K2 (b6b8) M1 S1 (b5b8) Serial 14 Others
Description Regenerator section error monitoring BIP-8 byte Multiplex section error monitoring BIP-24N byte Regenerator section DCC channel byte, 192 kbit/s Multiplex section DCC channel byte, 576 kbit/s Regenerator section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s Multiplex section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s User channel byte (to provide temporary data/voice channel connections for special maintenance purpose) Administrative unit pointer byte Positive or negative justification opportunity byte Regenerator section trace byte Multiplex section automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte Multiplex section remote defect indication (MS-RDI) byte Multiplex section remote error indication (MS-REI) byte Synchronization status byte Broadcast data byte To be determined
C.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description

The POH bytes include the higher order POH bytes and lower order POH bytes.
Higher Order Path Overhead Description

Table C-3 VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-xc POH bytes description Byte J1 B3 C2 G1 F2, F3 Description Path trace byte Path BIP-8 byte Signal label byte Path status byte Path user channels byte
C-6
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C Basic Principle
Byte H4 K3 (b1-b4) K3 (b5-b8) N1
Description Position indicator byte Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte Spare byte Network operator byte
NOTE The VC-4 POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261-column VC-4 structure. The VC-4-xc POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261 x X-column VC-4-Xc structure (cascaded by X VC-4s).
Lower Order Path Overhead Description

Table C-4 VC-12 POH bytes description Byte V5 J2 N2 K4 Description V5 byte (error checking, signal label and path status) Path trace byte Network operator byte Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
C.2 Introduction to ATM

This section describes the ATM cell structure and provides an overview of the ATM technology. C.2.1 Introduction to ATM The OptiX OSN product series can transmit, converge, and forward ATM services. C.2.2 ATM Cell Structure An ATM cell is of a fixed length, which is 53 bytes. An ATM cell consists of the cell header and cell payload.
C.2.1 Introduction to ATM

The OptiX OSN product series can transmit, converge, and forward ATM services.
Definition of ATM
The asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a cell-based technology, which consists of the transmission, multiplexing, and switching technologies. The switching technology of the ATM combines the advantages of packet switching and circuit switching. The ATM adopts the statistical multiplexing mode to realize fast packet switching. In this way, the ATM ensures the bandwidth utilization efficiency, and supports the real-time services of high rates and low rates.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd C-7
C Basic Principle
Advantages of ATM
l l
Sharing and statistic multiplexing of line bandwidth Capable of carrying multiple types of services and providing Quality of Service (QoS) service High-speed hardware switching because of fixed cell length Mature in technology and high standardization Extensive support from the telecommunication field Good network interconnection and interworking capability
l l l l
In the OSN product series, inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) technology is used to transmit ATM services. That is, a high-speed ATM link is transmitted over multiple low-speed physical links. For example, three E1s are used to transmit one 6 Mbit/s ATM link through IMA technology.
C.2.2 ATM Cell Structure

An ATM cell is of a fixed length, which is 53 bytes. An ATM cell consists of the cell header and cell payload. Figure C-7 shows the ATM cell structure. Figure C-7 ATM cell structure
8 7 6 5 4 Header (5 bytes) Payload (48 bytes) ATM cell GFC VPI VCI VCI PT HEC UNI header structure CLP VCI HEC NNI header structure 3 2 VPI VCI VPI VCI PT CLP 1 8 7 6 5 4 VPI VCI 3 2 1
GFC: general flow control VPI : virtual path identification VCI : virtual channel identification PT : payload type CLP : cell loss priority HEC : header error control UNI : user network interface NNI : network node interface
The contents of the ATM cell header at the UNI are slightly different from the contents of the ATM cell header at the NNI. The difference is that the ATM cell header at the UNI contains GFC requirements.
C.3 Introduction to Ethernet

This section describes the Ethernet basic principle and frame structure. C.3.1 Basic Technologies The equipment supports the transmission of Ethernet services. C.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure The OptiX OSN product series support Ethernet frame structures of three protocol types: Ethernet_II, 802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.
C-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C Basic Principle
C.3.1 Basic Technologies

The equipment supports the transmission of Ethernet services.
Half-Duplex CSMA/CD
According to the initial design objective of Ethernet, the computers and other digital equipment are connected through a shared physical line. The computers and digital equipment connected in this way must enter the physical line in the half-duplex mode. In addition, the design must provide a mechanism to detect and avoid conflict, and to prevent equipment contending for the line at the same time. This is called CSMA/CD. A piece of terminal equipment detects the status of the shared line continuously and transmits data only in the idle status. Otherwise, it waits until the line is idle. At this time, if another piece of equipment transmits data, the data sent by the two inevitably conflicts, making the signal on the line unstable. After detecting the conflict, the terminal equipment stops transmitting the data quickly and then sends a succession of interfering pulse. After waiting for a period of time, it sends the data again. The purpose of sending the interfering pulse is to notify the other equipment, that is, the equipment that sends the data at the same time, that a conflict occurs on the line. The waiting time after detection of conflict is random but gradually increases.
Full-Duplex Ethernet and Ethernet Switch

In 1990, the appearance of the 10BAST-T Ethernet based on the twisted pair cable is the most important event in the history of Ethernet. Using twisted pair cable as the transmission medium of Ethernet not only increases the flexibility and reduces the cost, but also introduces the full duplex mode, which is an efficient operation mode. In the full-duplex mode, the data is transmitted and received simultaneously. The traditional network equipment hub does not support full-duplex, because inside the hub is a bus, over which data is transmitted and received, therefore there is no way for full-duplex communication. To achieve full-duplex, a new type of equipment namely the switch must be introduced. The switch and the hub are the same in appearance. They both have multiple ports, each of which connects to the terminal equipment and other multiple-port equipment. Instead of a shared bus, there is a digital cross-connect network inside the switch, which temporarily connects every terminal, enabling the terminals to transmit data independently. In addition, the switch sets a buffer area for each port, storing the data transmitted from terminals temporarily, and performs switching after idle resources are available. It is the appearance of the switch that changes the original 10/100 Mbit/s shared structure to 20/200 Mbit/s exclusive structure, greatly enhancing the transmission efficiency. In addition, certain software can be added to the switch to implement additional services, such as VLAN, priority, redundant link.
Auto Negotiation
In actual situations, Ethernet can transmit data in the full duplex mode or half duplex mode at the rate of 10 Mbit/s, or 100 Mbit/s, through type 5 twisted pair cable or type 3 twisted pair. If each terminal equipment is configured manually, it will be difficult to maintain the equipment. Auto negotiation provides a solution for addressing this problem. Through auto negotiation, the equipment at both ends of a physical link selects a transmission mode automatically by exchanging information. Auto negotiation is based on the Ethernet connected by using a twisted pair cable, which is only effective for such an Ethernet. The contents
C Basic Principle
of auto negotiation include the duplex mode, bit rate, flow control. If the negotiation passes, the equipment at both ends of the link works in the mode negotiated.
C.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure

The OptiX OSN product series support Ethernet frame structures of three protocol types: Ethernet_II, 802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP. Figure C-8 shows the Ethernet frame structure of OSN product series. Figure C-8 Ethernet frame structure
Unit: byte 6 Destination MAC 6 Source MAC 2 Protocol type Ethernet_II 46- 1500 Data 4 FCS
6 Destination MAC
6 Source MAC
2 Protocol length
1 DSAP
1 SSAP
1 CTL
43-1497 Data
4 FCS
802.3
6 Destination MAC
6 Source MAC
2 Protocol length
1 0xAA
1 0xAA
1 CTL
3 OC
2 Protocol type
38-1492 Data
4 FCS
Ethernet_SNAP
C.4 Link Aggregation

This section describes the basic principle of link aggregation and the relevant frame structure. C.4.1 Concepts Link aggregation means bundling multiple physical links that are connected to one piece of equipment. The aggregated links are considered as one link. C.4.2 Characteristics Link aggregation includes manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic aggregation.
C.4.1 Concepts
Link aggregation means bundling multiple physical links that are connected to one piece of equipment. The aggregated links are considered as one link. As shown in Figure C-9.
C-10
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C Basic Principle
Figure C-9 Schematic diagram of link aggregation
traffic
C.4.2 Characteristics
Link aggregation includes manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic aggregation.
Enhancing Link Availability

In link aggregation, links back up each other dynamically. When a link breaks, the other links can quickly provide a backup. The switching process takes place within the aggregation. It is unrelated with other links.
Increasing Link Capacity

The aggregation technology can improve the link transmission capability economically. Without upgrading the existing equipment, the user can obtain a data link of larger bandwidth, which is equal to the capacity of a number of physical links. The aggregation module allocates the traffic to different members according to a certain algorithm to realize load balancing at link level.
Aggregation Types
There are three aggregation types: manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic aggregation.
l
Manual aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port does not run the link aggregation control protocol (LACP).
l
Static aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port runs the LACP.
l
Dynamic aggregation
The LACP based on IEEE 802.3ad is used.
C.5 Introduction to MPLS

This section describes the MPLS basic principle and frame structure. C.5.1 Overview MPLS is short for multi-protocol label switching. C.5.2 Encapsulation Format
C Basic Principle
The MPLS label is usually added between Layer 2 headers and Layer 3 headers. The OptiX OSN equipment supports MPLS encapsulation formats such as MartinioE and MatinioP.
C.5.1 Overview
MPLS is short for multi-protocol label switching. MPLS is a standard routing and switching technology platform that supports various upper layer protocols and services The MPLS architecture consists of the following:
l l
Control plane, which is connectionless and implemented with the current IP network. Forwarding plane, also called data plane, is connection-oriented, and takes advantage of the Layer 2 network such as ATM and frame relay.
MPLS uses a short label of fixed length to encapsulate packets, and implements fast forwarding on the data plane. MPLS uses powerful, flexible routing functions of the IP network on the control plane to address various new applications. MPLS is originated from the Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4), and its core technology can be extended to multiple network protocols, including the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6), Internet Packet Exchange (IPX), Appletalk, DECnet, Connectionless Network Protocol (CLNP). "Multiprotocol" in the MPLS denotes supporting multiple network protocols. OSN product series support the use of MPLS on IPv4, IPv6 and IPX.
C.5.2 Encapsulation Format

The MPLS label is usually added between Layer 2 headers and Layer 3 headers. The OptiX OSN equipment supports MPLS encapsulation formats such as MartinioE and MatinioP. Figure C-10 shows the two encapsulation formats. The encapsulation content is marked in grey. Figure C-10 MPLS encapsulation format
Unit : byte MartinioE encapsulation format DA A 66 SA A 66 0x8847 0x8847(0x8848 (0x8848 broadcast) 2 2 Tunnel 4 4 VC 4 4 Ethernet data N
MartinioP encapsulation format 0x8847 (0x8848 broadcast)) 0x8847(0x8848 2 Tunnel Tunnel 4 4 VC VC 4 4 Ethernet data N
The meanings of the bytes in Figure C-10 are shown in Table C-5. Table C-5 The meanings of the bytes in the MPLS encapsulation format Name DA
C-12
Meaning Destination address

C Basic Principle
Name SA Tunnel VC 0x8847 0x8848
Meaning Source address Tunnel label Virtual channel MPLS Martini encapsulation format Broadcast frame
C.6 QinQ Principle

This section describes the QinQ basic principle and frame structure. C.6.1 Introduction to QinQ The QinQ is a VLAN stack embedding technology, which complies with the S-VLAN requirements in IEEE 802.1ad. The QinQ technology supplements the VLAN technology that complies with IEEE 802.1q. C.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure The QinQ data frame involves the types of VLAN labels, which include S-VLAN labels and CVLAN labels.
C.6.1 Introduction to QinQ

The QinQ is a VLAN stack embedding technology, which complies with the S-VLAN requirements in IEEE 802.1ad. The QinQ technology supplements the VLAN technology that complies with IEEE 802.1q. The advantages of QinQ technology are as follows:
l
Expands VLAN and alleviates VLAN resource insufficiency. For example, a VLAN providing 4096 VLAN IDs can provide 40964096 VLANs after VLAN stacking. Extends LAN service to WAN, connecting the client network to the carrier network and supporting transparent transmission.
C.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure

The QinQ data frame involves the types of VLAN labels, which include S-VLAN labels and CVLAN labels.
VLAN Label Types

IEEE 802.1ad defines two VLAN label types, as shown in Figure C-11.
l l
Customer VLAN label, defined as C-VLAN. Server layer VLAN label, defined as S-VLAN.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C-13
C Basic Principle
Figure C-11 QinQ data frame structure

6 Bytes Destination MAC 6 Bytes Source MAC 4 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes
S-VLAN label
C-VLAN label
Length/type
Data
FCS
The maximum length of the frame is determined by the port attribute settings of the equipment.
Structure of S-VLAN and C-VLAN

The 4-byte S-VLAN and C-VLAN labels can be further divided into two parts: TPID and TCI, each of which has two bytes.
l
TPID
TPID indicates the type of the VLAN label. The TPID of C-VLAN is fixed to 0X8100 and that of S-VLAN is configurable, as shown in Table C-6. Table C-6 TPID settings Tag type C-VLAN TAG S-VLAN TAG Name 802.1Q Tag Protocol Type (802.1Q TagType) 802.1Q Service Tag Type (802.1Q S Tag Type) ID 0X8100 Configurabl e
C-VLAN tag (C-TAG) is used to identify the customer VLAN and is used on the VLAN Bridge and PEB equipment. S-VLAN tag (S-TAG) is used to identify the server VLAN and is used on the PB and PEB equipment.
l
TCI
The TCI structure of S-TAG is basically the same as that of C-TAG, as shown in Figure C-12 and Figure C-13. VLAN ID (VID) is still 12 bits, ranging from 0 to 4095. The difference is that S-TAG introduces the concept of Drop Eligible (DE). Priority code point (PCP), used with DE, indicates the priority of the S-TAG frame. Figure C-12 C-TAG TCI structure
Octets : Bits : 1 PCP 8 6 CFI 5 4 1 8 2 VID 1
C-14
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C Basic Principle
Figure C-13 S-TAG TCI structure

Octets : Bits : 1 PCP 8 6 DE 5 4 1 8 2 VID 1
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
C-15
D Glossary
D
1+1 protection 1:N protection 3R A ATM Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.
Glossary
A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra traffic signal.
Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. It is a protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists of a 5 octet header followed by 48 octets of data.
B Bandwidth The value numerically equal to the lowest frequency at which the magnitude of the baseband transfer function of an optical fiber decreases to a specified fraction, generally to -3 dB optical (-6 dB electrical), of the zero frequency value. The bandwidth is limited by several mechanisms: mainly modal distortion and chromatic dispersion in multimode fibers. Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office. It is sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit. A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into the OSN product series. That is, the OSN products can add and drop several wavelengths directly.
BITS
Build-in WDM
C Congestion The condition that exists in a network, if the capacity required for the instantaneous traffic exceeds the bandwidth available in the network.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
D-1
D Glossary
Control plane
A set of communicating entities that are responsible for the establishment of connections including set-up, release, supervision and maintenance. A control plane is supported by a signaling network. The process of developing a model of the echo path which will be used in the echo estimator to produce the estimate of the circuit echo. In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a probe so that it appears that the described messages were modified.
Convergence Conversion
D Distributed transaction DNI A transaction, parts of which may be carried out in more than one open system. Dual Node Interconnection. Both ring networks have two nodes that are interconnected with each other. DNI not only provides protection for ring-cross services but also for the failed node of two interconnected nodes. Therefore, it improves the network availability.
E EPL Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. Ethernet Private LAN. An EPLn service is a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. Ethernet Virtual Private Line. An EVPL service is a service that is both a line service and a virtual private service. Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. An EVPLn service is a service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service. European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EPLn
EVPL EVPLn ETSI F Fairness algorithm
A mechanism that enforces fairness among the nodes on the ring. It applies only to LP and excess medium priority traffic coming from the MAC client. Each node is assigned a weight, which allows the user to allocate more ring bandwidth to certain nodes. Forward error correction. It is a technology used for enhancing the reliability of digital transmission. It can increase the transmission distance and improve the network performance.
FEC
D-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
D Glossary
IMA
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group. Group of links at one end used to establish an IMA virtual link to other end. Sublayer part of the physical layer that is located between the interface specific Transmission Convergence (TC) sublayer and the ATM layer. Virtual link established between two IMA units over a number of physical links (IMA group). Service that is configured directly by the T2000. The service within the transmission network is requested by the T2000 and then created by the control plane of the NE through signaling. The IP Over DCC follows the TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1D3) for communication.
IMA frame
IMA group IMA sublayer IMA virtual link ASON service
IP over DCC
L Loopback The fault of each path on the optical fiber can be located by setting the loopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback modes: No loopback, outloop, inloop.
M MSP Multiplexer Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides the capability for switching a signal from a working section to a protection section. An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, where the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels are fixed.
O Orderwire Overhead information It establishes the voice communication among the operators and maintenance engineers working in each working station. Auxiliary Channel Overhead Information is information that may be transferred by an optical network layer, but which does not have to be associated with a particular connection. An example of such an auxiliary channel is a data communications channel used for the purposes of transferring management data between management entities. These management entities are not trail termination and adaptation functions.
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
D-3
D Glossary
Paired slot
Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be passed through between the paired slots by using the directly connected overhead bus. When two SDH boards form an MSP ring, the boards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the K bytes can be passed through.
R RPR Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technology supporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ring configuration. The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
Regeneration
S SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks. SubNetwork Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection. The source broadcasts services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service needs to be received according to the service priority and the service quality. Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection. It provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all the services in the working path are switched to the protection path. Service Level Agreement. A negotiated agreement between an end user and the service provider. Its significance varies according to the service offerings. The SLA may include a number of attributes such as, but not limited to, traffic contract, availability, performance, encryption, authentication, pricing and billing mechanism . The service plane comprises: a) service presentation functionality being presented to the end user; b) service implementation aspects with which the end user interacts. For example, service invocation, control service level agreement function. The service presentation and service implementation aspects use the totality of the transfer capabilities including control and management functionalities.
SNCP
SNCMP
SNCTP
SLA
Service plane
T TPS Tributary Protection Switching. A function provided by the equipment, which is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
D-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
D Glossary
TCM
Tandem Connection Monitor. In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section). Single timeslot on a E1 digital interfacethat is, a 64-kbps, synchronous, full-duplex data channel, typically used for a single voice connection.
Timeslot
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
D-5
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
E
A ABR ADM AMI APS ASON ATM B BITS BPA C CAR CBR CC CF CMI CR-LDP CSPF D DCC DCE
Acronyms and Abbreviations
This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.
Available Bit Rate Add/Drop Multiplexer Alternate Mark Inversion Automatic Protection Switching Automatically Switched Optical Network Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Building Integrated Timing Supply System Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit
Committed Access Rate Constant Bit Rate Continuity Check Compact Flash Coded Mark Inversion Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol Constrained Shortest Path First
Data Communication Channels Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
E-1
DDN DVB-ASI DWDM E ECC EMC EPL EPLAN ESCON ETS ETSI EVPL EVPLAN F FC FE FEC FPGA G GE GFP GMPLS H HDB3 HDLC I IEC IEEE IETF IGMP IMA
Digital Data Network Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Embedded Control Channel Electromagnetic Compatibility Ethernet Private Line Ethernet Private LAN Enterprise Systems Connection European Telecommunication Standards European Telecommunications Standards Institute Ethernet Virtual Private Line Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
Fiber Channel Fast Ethernet Forward Error Correction Field Programmable Gate Array
Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure General Multiprotocol Label Switching
High Density Bipolar of order 3 code High level Data Link Control
International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Internet Engineering Task Force Internet Group Management Protocol Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
E-2
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
ITU-T L LACP LAN LAPS LB LCAS LCT LPT LSP M MAC MADM MCF MLM MPLS MSP N NEBS nrt-VBR NS NSF O OADM OAM OAM&P OSP OTM P PDH
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Local Area Network; Local Area Network Link Access Procedure-SDH Loopback Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Local Craft Terminal Link State Path Through Label Switch Path
Media Access Control Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer Message Communication Function Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser) Multiprotocol Label Switching Multiplex Section Protection
Network Equipment-Building System Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate Network Side Non-interrupted Service Forwarding
Optical Add/drop Multiplexer Operation, Administration and Maintenance Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision OptiX Software Platform Optical Terminal Multiplexer
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
E-3
PE PPP Q QoS R RPR RSTP rt-VBR RSVP-TE S SDH SFP SLA SLM SNCP SNCMP SNCTP STP T TCM TPS U UBR V VC VCC VLAN VP VPC VPN
Provider Edge Point-to-Point Protocol
Quality of Service
Resilient Packet Ring Rapid Span Tree Protocol Real Time Variable Bite rate Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering Extensions
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Small Form Pluggable Service Level Agreement Single-Longitudinal Mode (laser) Subnetwork Connection Protection Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection Spanning Tree Protocol
Tandem Connection Monitoring Tributary Protection Switching
Unspecified Bit Rate
Virtual Channel Virtual Channel Connection Virtual Local Area Network Virtual Path Virtual Path Connection Virtual Private Network
E-4
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
W WDM WTR Wavelength Division Multiplexing Wait-to-Restore
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
E-5
Index
Index
A
access capacity slot, 2-5 ASON feature, 2-18 software, 4-5 ASON clock tracing, 7-7 ASON trail group, 7-27 ATM application, 5-30 function, 5-28 protection, 5-34 auto-discovery control link, 7-3 TE link, 7-4 auxiliary board, 3-33 copper service, 7-18 cross-connect capacity, 2-3
D
data processing board, 3-23 DCC allocation mode, 6-4 DDN application, 5-37 function, 5-36 DDN processing board, 3-22 diamond service, 7-11
E
E13 function, 2-19 electromagnetic compatibility, 12-19 environment operation, 12-26 specification, 12-21 storage, 12-22 transportation, 12-24 EPL based on port, 5-10 equilibrium of network traffic, 7-26 ETH-OAM, 2-19 Ethernet application, 5-10 function, 5-2 protection, 5-14 extended subrack, 2-14
B
board function, 3-8 software, 4-2 type, 3-8 board version replacement, 2-22 built-in WDM, 2-13
C
cabinet, 3-2 clock, 2-23 clock output, 9-3 clock protection extended SSM enabled, 9-6 SSM not enabled, 9-4 standard SSM enabled, 9-5 clock source external, 9-2 free-run mode, 9-3 holdover mode, 9-3 internal, 9-3 line, 9-2 locked mode, 9-3 tributary, 9-2
G
gold service, 7-15
H
hot patch, 2-21 HWECC application, 6-5 feature, 6-5
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
i-1
Index
I
intelligent fan, 8-7 inter-board alarm suppression, 2-21 interface administration, 2-10 alarm, 2-11 ATM service, 2-10 clock, 2-11 DDN service, 2-10 Ethernet service, 2-10 orderwire, 2-10 PDH service, 2-9 SAN service, 2-10 SDH service, 2-9 type, 12-3 IP over DCC application, 6-7 feature, 6-7 iron service, 7-19
L
LCAS dynamic bandwidth adjustment, 5-15 virtual concatenation group protection, 5-15 log, 11-3 security log, 11-4 Syslog, 11-4
preset restoring trail, 7-25 protection 1+1 BPS, 8-5 1+1 for ATM board, 8-6 1+1 for WDM, 8-6 1+1 hot backup cross-connect and timing, 8-3 PIU, 8-6 SCC, 8-4 1+1 PPS, 8-5 1:N for +3.3 V, 8-7 DLAG, 8-5 DNI, 8-16 equipment level, 2-16 fiber-shared virtual trail, 8-18 linear MSP, 8-8 MSP ring, 8-9 network level, 2-17 optical-path-shared MSP, 8-18 RPR, 8-19 SNCP, 8-11 TPS, 8-2 under abnormal conditions, 8-7 VP-ring/VC-ring, 8-21 protocol encryption, 7-28
R
REG function, 2-15 retiming application, 9-8 principle, 9-8 RPR, 2-19 application, 5-22 function, 5-19 protection, 5-24
M
M13 function, 2-19
N
NE software, 4-3 network application, 1-1 networking, 2-11 NSF, 2-22
S
safety certification, 12-20 SAN feature, 5-35 SDH DCN background, 6-3 HWECC, 6-5 IP over DCC, 6-7 OSI over DCC, 6-8 solution, 6-3 SDH processing board, 3-11 SDH service, 2-7 security access control, 11-2 ACL, 11-2 authentication, 11-2 authorization, 11-2 log, 11-3 network, 11-2 password, 11-3
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
O
OAM information interworking, 2-23 network management, 10-3 security management, 2-24, 11-1 operation and maintenance, 10-2 optical booster amplifier board, 3-32 OSI over DCC application, 6-8 feature, 6-8
P
PDH processing board, 3-17 PRBS function, 2-21
i-2
Index
security log, 11-4 Syslog, 11-4 system, 11-3 user name, 11-3 service access capacity, 2-8 service association, 7-21 service configuration, 7-5 service migration, 7-23 service optimization, 7-22 shared risk link group, 7-27 silver service, 7-16 SLA, 7-10 slot access capacity, 2-5 allocation, 3-4 software board, 4-2 software package loading, 2-20 software structure, 4-2 specification ATM optical interface, 12-11 auxiliary interface, 12-14 cabinet, 12-17 clock interface , 12-16 colored optical interface, 12-9 DDN interface, 12-13 Ethernet optical interface, 12-10 interface, 12-3 laser safety class, 12-12 PDH electrical interface, 12-13 power consumption and weight, A-1 power supply, 12-18 STM-1 optical interface, 12-4 STM-16 optical interface, 12-5 FEC, 12-5 STM-4 optical interface, 12-4 STM-64 optical interface, 12-6 FEC, 12-7 subrack, 12-18 wavelength and frequency, 12-8 subrack structure, 3-4 system architecture, 3-7
T
T2000 system, 4-4 TCM, 2-18 timeslot numbering, 12-17 timing and synchronization performance, 12-16 transmission performance, 12-16 tunnel, 7-19
W
WDM board, 3-29
Issue 03 (2008-07-30)
i-3

00384238-OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R008 - 03)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

00384238-OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R008 - 03)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

Issue Date Part Number

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

A Power Consumption and Weight of Boards.......................................................................A-1 B Compliant Standards...............................................................................................................B-1

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

About This Document

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

6 DCN Features 7 ASON Features 8 Protection

11 Security Management 12 Technical Specifications

A Power Consumption and Weight of Boards B Compliant Standards

C Basic Principle D Glossary E Acronyms and Abbreviations

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

About This Document

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Convention { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... } *

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

About This Document

Updates in Issue 03 (2008-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R008

Optimize the figures. Several bugs are fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R008

Chapter 10 OAM is optimized, and chapter 11 Security Management is added.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-25) Based on Product Version V100R008

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R007

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Based on Product Version V100R007

The access capacity in 2.2.2 Service Access Capacity is rectified.

About This Document

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Based on Product Version V100R007

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R006

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-01-10) Based on Product Version V100R006

Updates in Issue 01 (2006-09-20) Based on Product Version V100R006

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd